Download as pdf or txt
Download as pdf or txt
You are on page 1of 272

Hardware and Software

Installation

TRACER SUMMIT™
Version 16

BMTW-SVN01F-EN
Hardware and Software
Installation

Tracer Summit™
Version 16

Tracer Summit Version 16 BMTW-SVN01F-EN


July 2004
BMTW-SVN01F-EN
Tracer Summit Hardware and Software Installation

This guide and the information in it are the property of American Standard Inc. and may not be used or reproduced in whole or in part,
without the written permission of American Standard Inc. Trane, a division of American Standard Inc., has a policy of continuous prod-
uct improvement and reserves the right to change design and specification without notice.

Use of the software contained in this package is provided under a software license agreement. Unauthorized use of the software or
related materials discussed in this guide can result in civil damages and criminal penalties. The terms of this license are included with
the compact disk. Please read them thoroughly.

Although Trane has tested the system described in this guide, no guarantee is offered that the system is error free.

Trane reserves the right to revise this publication at any time and to make changes to its content without obligation to notify any per-
son of such revision or change.

Trane may have patents or pending patent applications covering items in this publication. By providing this document, Trane does not
imply giving license to these patents.

™® The following are trademarks or registered trademarks of American Standard Inc.: CenTraVac, Dragon, Eagle, Horizon,
IntelliPak, TCM, Tracer, Tracer Summit, Trane, UCP2, VariTrac, VariTrane, CenTraVac, and Voyager.

™® he following are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies or organizations: ARCNET from
Datapoint Corporation; AutoCAD from Autodesk; BACnet from ASHRAE; Neuron, LonMark, LonTalk, and LonWorks from
Echelon Corporation; Pentium from Intel Corporation; Windows, Windows XP, Internet Explorer, SQL database, and
Microsoft from Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries.

Printed in the U.S.A.


© 2004 American Standard Inc.

BMTW-SVN01F-EN
NOTICE:
Warnings and Cautions appear at appropriate sections throughout this manual. Read these carefully:

WARNING
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation, which, if not avoided, could result in death or serious injury.

CAUTION
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation, which, if not avoided, may result in minor or moderate injury.
It may also be used to alert against unsafe practices.

CAUTION
Indicates a situation that may result in equipment damage or property damage.

The following format and symbol conventions appear at appropriate sections throughout this manual:

IMPORTANT
Alerts installer, servicer, or operator to potential actions that could cause the product or system to
operate improperly but will not likely result in potential for damage.

Note:
A note may be used to make the reader aware of useful information, to clarify a point, or to describe
options or alternatives.

◆ This symbol precedes a procedure that consists of only a single step.

BMTW-SVN01F-EN
Contents

Chapter 1 Before Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1


Tracer Summit System Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
The Modular BCU (BMTW) and the BCU (BMTS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
BCU Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
UCM Communication Links—Wiring Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Twisted-Pair Wire—Comm2, Comm3, and Comm4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Twisted-Pair Wire—Comm5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Fiber-Optic Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
LAN Communication Links—Wiring Requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Coaxial Cable (10Base2 or “Thinnet”)—Ethernet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Unshielded, Twisted-Pair Wire (10BaseT)—Ethernet . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Coaxial Cable—ARCNET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Fiber-Optic Cable—Ethernet and ARCNET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Optical-Link Loss Budget . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Remote Communication Requirements and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . 9
Communication Rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Communication Protocol. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
BCU Internal Modem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
PC Workstation Modem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
PC Workstation Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Hardware Requirements for Tracer Summit Standard Software,
Tracer 100/Tracker Communications Package, and Building
Communications Package. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Hardware Requirements for Tracer Summit Enterprise
Management Package . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Software Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11
Inspection Upon Receipt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11
Model Number Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Hardware Installation Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Panel Placement (Chapter 2)) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Power Supply Wiring (Chapter 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Assignable Input Wiring (Chapter 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
UCM Wiring (Chapters 4 and 5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Network Wiring (Chapter 6). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

BMTW-SVN01F-EN i
Contents

BCU Modem Installation (Chapter 7) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

Chapter 2 BCU Mounting and Power Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . 15


BCU Mounting and Power Wiring for
North American Installations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
BCU Mounting for North American Installations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Select a Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Verify Conformance to BCU Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Verify Conformance to Clearance Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Secure the BCU to the Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Install the Optional Operator Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
BCU Power Wiring for North American Installations. . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Verify Compliance with Circuit Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Connect the AC-Power Wires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
BCU Mounting and Power Wiring for European
Community Installations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
BCU Mounting for European Community Installations. . . . . . . . . . 21
Select a Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Verify Conformance to BCU Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Verify Conformance to Clearance Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Secure the BCU to the Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Install the Optional Operator Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
BCU Power Wiring for European Community Installations . . . . . . 24
Verify Compliance with Circuit Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Connect the AC-Power Wires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
BCU Mounting and Power Wiring for International Installations . . . . . 26
BCU Mounting for International Installations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Select a Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Verify Conformance to BCU Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Verify Conformance to Clearance Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Secure the BCU to the Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Install the Optional Operator Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
BCU Power Wiring for International Installations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Verify Compliance with Circuit Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Connect the AC-Power Wires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Preliminary AC-Power Checkout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Installing and Wiring the BCU Logic Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
BCU Warning Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Installing and Removing the BCU Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Installing the Optional Operator Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

ii BMTW-SVN01F-EN
Contents

Chapter 3 BCU I/O Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37


BCU I/O Module Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
I/O Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Hardware UIP Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Binary/Pulse Meter Configured UIPs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Thermistor Configured UIPs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Current and Voltage Configured UIPs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Binary Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

Chapter 4 UCM Communication-Link Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . 45


Communication Links. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
UCM Communication Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Comm2 Card. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Isolated Comm3 Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Non-Isolated Comm3 Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Comm4 Card. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Comm5 Card. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Installing UCM Communication Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Uninstalling UCM Communication Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Communication-Link Wire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
UCM Communication-Wire Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Comm5 UCM Communication-Wire Characteristics. . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Recommended Configurations for UCM
Communication-Link Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Termination Resistor placement for
Comm3 and Comm4 links. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Termination Resistance Placement for Comm5 Links . . . . . . . . . . 59
Comm5 Physical Link Repeater. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
When is the Link Repeater Required? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Link Repeater Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Link Repeater Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Recommended Wiring Practices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Fiber-Optic UCM Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Fiber-Optic Modems. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Optical-Link Loss Budget . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

Chapter 5 UCM Wiring and Addressing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69


CenTraVac Unit Control Panel (UCP1) Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Type of Communication Card: Comm2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Wiring Notes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

BMTW-SVN01F-EN iii
Contents

Device Addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Centrifugal/Absorption/Helical Rotary Chiller (UCP2) Interface . . . . . . 71
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Type of Communication Card: Comm4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Wiring Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Device Addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Commercial Self-Contained (CSC) and IntelliPak CSC Interfaces . . . . . 74
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Type of Communication Card: Isolated Comm3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Wiring Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Device Addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Horizon Absorption Chiller Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Type of Communication Card: Comm4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Wiring Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Device Addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
IntelliPak Rooftop Unit Interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Type of Communication Card: Comm4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Wiring Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Device Addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Lighting Control Panel (LCP) Interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Type of Communication Card: Isolated Comm3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Wiring Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Device Addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Programmable Control Module (PCM) Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Type of Communication Card: Isolated Comm3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Wiring Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Device Addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
RTA-RTW Chiller Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Type of Communication Card: Isolated Comm3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Wiring Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Device Addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Scroll Chillers: U.S.-built CGA/CGW and
IntelliPak (CGAF) Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Type of Communication Card: Isolated Comm3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Wiring Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

iv BMTW-SVN01F-EN
Contents

Device Addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102


Terminal Unit Controller (TUC) Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Type of Communication Card: Comm4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Wiring Notes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Device Addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Thermostat Control Module (TCM) Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Type of Communication Card: Isolated Comm3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Wiring Notes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Device Addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Tracer Remote Station (TRS) Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
Type of Communication Card: Non-Isolated Comm3 . . . . . . . . . . .112
Wiring Notes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
Device Addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114
Trane Europe Chiller Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115
Type of Communication Card: Isolated Comm3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115
Wiring Notes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115
Device Addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116
Universal Programmable Control Module (UPCM) Interface . . . . . . . .117
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117
Type of Communication Card: Comm4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117
Wiring Notes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117
Device Addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118
VariTrac II Central Control Panel (CCP) Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Type of Communication Card: Isolated Comm3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Wiring Notes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Device Addressing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
VariTrane DDC/VAV UCMs Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Type of Communication Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Wiring Notes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Device Addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
VAV Wireless Receiver Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Type of Communication Card: Comm4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Wiring Notes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Device Addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135

BMTW-SVN01F-EN v
Contents

Voyager Rooftop Unit Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137


Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Type of Communication Card: Comm3 or Comm4 . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Wiring Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Device Addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Comm5 UCMs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Description of Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Tracer AH540 and Tracer AH541
Air-Handler Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Tracer Loop Controller Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Tracer MP501 Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Tracer MP503 I/O Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Tracer MP580 and Tracer MP581 Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Tracer Zone Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Tracer VV550 and Tracer VV551 controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Generic LonTalk® Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Type of Communication Card: Comm5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Wiring Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Neuron ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Comm5 Zone Sensor Communication Jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Zone Sensor Communication Stubs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144

Chapter 6 Network Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147


Network Communication Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Tracer Summit PC Workstations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Connecting Dedicated and Shared Networks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
BACnet—Device IDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Network Topology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Bus Topology. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Ethernet LAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
ARCNET LAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Star Topology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Ethernet LAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
ARCNET LAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Combination Bus/Star Topology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Ethernet LAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
ARCNET LAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Calculating Delays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Ethernet Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Ethernet Network Interface Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157

vi BMTW-SVN01F-EN
Contents

Configuring an Ethernet Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157


Installing an Ethernet Card in the BCU Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
ARCNET Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
ARCNET Single Coaxial Input Interface Card. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
ARCNET Single Fiber-Optic Input Interface Card. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
ARCNET Three Input Coaxial Hub Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
ARCNET Two Coaxial/One Fiber-Optic Hub Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
ARCNET One Coaxial/Two Fiber-Optic Hub Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Configuring an ARCNET Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
ARCNET Card Jumper Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
ARCNET Card DIP Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Installing an ARCNET Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Installing Coaxial Cable Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
IP Installation Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Preinstallation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Programming the Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
BCU (BMTW) Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
System Checkout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Setting Up the Broadcast Distribution Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Special Situations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Multiple Sites on a Single Shared Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
BACnet/IP Routers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Connecting a Service Laptop Computer to an
IP Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
EIA-232 Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Installing an EIA-232 Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Configuring a BACnet-Compatible Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Specifications for EIA-232 Cable Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
DB-9 Pin Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
DB-25 Connector Pin Assignments. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174

Chapter 7 BCU Modem Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175


Modem Card Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Jumper Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Modem Function Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Installing a Modem Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178

Chapter 8 Installing Tracer Summit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179


Installing Tracer Summit using Windows XP or Windows 2000 . . . . 180
Setting UP Network Adapters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180

BMTW-SVN01F-EN vii
Contents

Installing the Network Adapter Protocol. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181


Installing TCP/IP Protocol for BACnet/IP
Communications on Shared Ethernet Networks . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Verifying Network Adapter Status and
Protocol for Windows XP or Windows 2000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Installing Tracer Summit using Windows 98 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Setting UP Network Adapters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Installing the Network Adapter Protocol. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Installing TCP/IP Protocol for BACnet/IP
Communications on Shared Ethernet Networks . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Verifying Network Adapter Status and
Protocol for Windows 98 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Verifying Adapter Status for Resource
Conflicts for Windows 98. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Determining Available IRQ and I/O Addresses for the ISA and
PCMCIA ARCNET Adapters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Custom Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Installing Tracer Summit using Windows ME. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Setting up Network Adapters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Installing the Network Adapter Protocol. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Installing TCP/IP Protocol for BACnet/IP
Communications on Shared Ethernet Networks . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Verifying Network Adapter Status and
Protocol for Windows ME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Installing Tracer Summit using Windows NT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Setting UP Network Adapters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Installing the Network Adapter Protocol. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Installing TCP/IP Protocol for BACnet/IP
Communications on Shared Ethernet Networks . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Verifying Network Adapter Status and
Protocol for Windows NT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Uninstalling Tracer Summit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Configuring BCUs for BACnet/IP Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Starting Tracer Summit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194

Chapter 9 Installing the Daily Operations Tutorial . . . . . . . 195

Chapter 10 BCU Operation and Communication Status . . . 199


LED Indicators for BCU Communication Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
LED Codes for BCU Operation Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Startup Sequence Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203

viii BMTW-SVN01F-EN
Contents

New BCU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203


Programmed BCU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
BCU Reset Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Clear BCU RAM and Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Clear Database, RAM, and Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Clear Code, Database, RAM, and Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205

Chapter 11 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207


BCU Does Not Respond . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
BCU Locks Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
BCU Does Not Communicate Via Modem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Problems with the Modem and Phone Line. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Problems with the BCU Modem Programming Setup . . . . . . . . . 209
BCU Does Not Communicate with UCMs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Communication Failures on Initial Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Communication Failures that Occur After Initial Installation . . . . 210
BCU Panel Mismatch Error. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210

Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213

Appendix A Setting DIP Switch Addresses. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

Appendix B BCU (BMTS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223


BCU (BMTS) Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Installing UCM Communication Cards in a BCU (BMTS) . . . . . . . . . . 226
Communication-Link Field Wiring for the BCU (BMTS) . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Startup and Troubleshooting Sequence for the BCU (BMTS). . . . . . . 229
BCU Power-up Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Effect of Cycling BCU Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
BCU Reset Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Clearing BCU RAM and Reset. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Clear Database, RAM, and Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Clear Code, Database, RAM, and Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Ethernet Card LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
ARCNET/Hub Card LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236

BMTW-SVN01F-EN ix
Contents

Appendix C Tracer Summit Critical Control System . . . . . . . 237


SQL Database Server Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
PC Workstation Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
SQL software installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Installing Tracer Summit Critical Control System using
Windows XP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Setting up network adapters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Installing the Network Adapter Protocol. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Installing TCP/IP Protocol for BACnet/IP
Communications on Shared Ethernet Networks . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Verifying Network Adapter Status and
Protocol for Windows XP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Initial Startup on SQL database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Registration considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Reader Response Form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255

x BMTW-SVN01F-EN
Chapter 1

Before Installation

Before installation:
• Be sure all items on the packing list are included and are
not damaged.
• Familiarize yourself with this guide and any support literature.
• Formulate a comprehensive installation plan for the entire Tracer
Summit system.

Tracer Summit System Overview


The Tracer Summit system provides building automation and energy
management functions. The system is capable of monitoring and control-
ling heating, ventilating, and air conditioning (HVAC) equipment and
providing management information and operator override capabilities.
Figure 1 on page 2 shows the options for a Tracer Summit system config-
uration. For a complete list of Trane Comm5 unit controllers, see Table 7
on page 46.
The interface for Tracer Summit uses a graphical format that is accessi-
ble through a PC Workstation. You can connect the PC Workstation and
building control unit (BCU) over an Ethernet LAN or an ARCNET LAN,
or remotely using modems specified by Trane.

The Modular BCU (BMTW) and


the BCU (BMTS)
The main purpose of this installation guide is to provide hardware and
software installation guidance for the modular BCU (BMTW). In the body
of this guide, the term BCU refers to the modular BCU (BMTW). In
Chapter 6, “Network Wiring,” where both BCU models are discussed, the
terms modular BCU (BMTW) and BCU (BMTS) are used.
Appendix B provides hardware installation guidance and troubleshooting
for owners of the BCU (BMTS). In Appendix B, the term BCU refers to
the BCU (BMTS).

BMTW-SVN01F-EN 1
Chapter 1 Before Installation

Figure 1. Tracer Summit System Configuration Options

2 BMTW-SVN01F-EN
BCU Components

BCU Components
The BCU (see Figure 2 on page 4) is a NEMA-1 rated enclosure that
houses the following:
• A standard capacity card (required)
• An optional high capacity card
• A terminator block (TB2)
• An optional I/O module with five universal inputs (UIPs), which can
be either analog or binary, and one binary output (BOP)
• Four unit control module (UCM) communication card slots for com-
munication links 1, 2, 3, and 4
• Three card slots for option cards supplied by Trane, such as Ethernet
cards, ARCNET cards, modem cards, or EIA-232 communication
cards for BACnet interface
• A seven-segment LED display for displaying BCU operation status;
the LED operation and codes are described in Chapter 10, “BCU
Operation and Communication Status”
• An operator display socket for attaching the optional BCU operator
display
• A mini-monitor port for attaching a PC with a straight-through
EIA-232 cable to access built-in diagnostic software; this port is
intended to be used by trained service technicians

Note:
If a BCU has an optional operator display, you need to unplug
the operator display ribbon cable from the operator display
socket and wait 10 seconds before the mini-monitor port
becomes active.

The main function of the BCU is to communicate with UCMs, PC Work-


stations, and other BCUs, and to execute all application programs.

BMTW-SVN01F-EN 3
Chapter 1 Before Installation

Figure 2. Tracer Summit BCU Component Layout

SET UP TOOL BCU I/O module


ONLY
cable

4 AMP MAX

ON OFF Optional BCU I/O


S2 ON
module

UCM communication
card slots

Seven-segment
LED display
Operator
display socket

High capacity Mini-monitor


card slot port
Standard capacity Option card
card slot slots

4 BMTW-SVN01F-EN
UCM Communication Links—Wiring Requirements

UCM Communication Links—


Wiring Requirements
Twisted-Pair Wire—Comm2, Comm3, and Comm4
All unit control modules (UCM) communication-link wiring must be 18-
gauge, shielded, twisted-pair wire with stranded, tinned-copper conduc-
tors.
The maximum length of link wiring (5,000 ft [1,524 m]) is a function of
the total resistance (which is determined by wire length) plus the capaci-
tance between conductors. Wire capacitance between conductors is an
important aspect of the UCM communication link. The wire should have
a maximum capacitance between conductors of 25 pF/ft (78 pF/m) for con-
nections up to 5,000 ft (1,524 m) maximum. Trane recommends that only
low-capacitance wire supplied by Trane be used for UCM communication
links. For UCM communication-link wiring, see Chapter 4, “UCM Com-
munication-Link Wiring.” UCM communication and sensor wire is avail-
able through your local Trane commercial sales office.

Twisted-Pair Wire—Comm5
The recommended Comm5 communication-link wiring is 22-gauge,
Level 4, twisted-pair wire. The wire can be either shielded or unshielded.
You can also use 18-gauge, shielded, twisted-pair with stranded, tinned-
copper conductors (Trane “purple” wire).

Note:
Do not mix wire types on a Comm5 link.

The maximum wire length for Comm5 communications is 4,500 ft


(1,400 m).

Fiber-Optic Cable
Fiber-optic cable is used for applications involving long distances because
there is little degradation of optic signals. Fiber-optic cable maintains the
integrity of the signal in the presence of various sources of electrical
noise, including lightning, electromagnetic interference/radio-frequency
interference (EMI/RFI), voltage conductors, and ground loops.

Note:
Use fiber-optic cable for long distances, interbuilding cabling, and/
or other areas of high electrical noise, such as petrochemical
installations, electronic rooms, and hospital nuclear magnetic res-
onance (NMR) or X-ray rooms.

BMTW-SVN01F-EN 5
Chapter 1 Before Installation

Trane requires duplex, 62.5 µm core glass fiber-optic cable with ST con-
nectors. The types of cable available for different applications include
indoor, outdoor, burial, aerial, and duct. Further descriptions of fiber-
optic cable and accessories are provided in Chapter 4, “UCM Communica-
tion-Link Wiring.”
You can order fiber-optic cables, fiber-optic modems, ST-type crimp con-
nectors, epoxy connectors, and other accessories from Trane.

LAN Communication Links—


Wiring Requirements
Coaxial Cable (10Base2 or “Thinnet”)—Ethernet
Use a 50 Ω coaxial cable (RG-58) for the Tracer Summit Ethernet link. No
other coaxial cable is supported.
You can order all Ethernet cables, adapters, crimp tools, stripper tools,
and other coaxial accessories from Trane.
For information about maximum cable length and maximum cable dis-
tance between two devices on a communication link, refer to Table 30 on
page 152.

Note:
Cable installations must comply with both federal and local codes.
Plenum-rated cable is available to meet NEC Article 725, which
addresses flame resistance and smoke emission for signal cables.

Unshielded, Twisted-Pair Wire (10BaseT)—Ethernet


In twisted-pair wiring, one pair is used to receive data signals and the
other pair is used to transmit data signals. The two wires in each pair
must be twisted together for the entire length of the segment to maximize
the signal-carrying characteristics of a wire pair. Multiple twisted-pair
segments communicate via a multiport hub.
You can only use twisted-pair wiring between a device (BCU or PC Work-
station) and a hub. If a direct connection between two devices is required,
then you must use a hub or crossover cable. For information about maxi-
mum wire length and maximum wire distance between two devices on a
communication link, refer to Table 30 on page 152.
Use Trane-supplied Category 5 cables, jumpers, connectors, and wire ter-
minating devices. These components work well for twisted-pair wires and
provide the best possible signal-carrying system for the Ethernet media
systems.
The EIA/TIA cabling standard recommends a segment length of 295 ft
(90 m) between the wire termination equipment in the wiring closet and
the wall plate in the office. This provides 33 ft (10 m) of cable allowance to

6 BMTW-SVN01F-EN
LAN Communication Links—Wiring Requirements

accommodate patch cables at each end of the link and signal losses in
intermediate wire terminations on the link.

IMPORTANT
Due to the high precision required when performing twisted-pair wire
terminations, Trane recommends that only qualified technicians with
the proper equipment handle all terminations and splicing.

Note:
Cable installations must comply with both federal and local
codes. Plenum-rated cable is available to meet NEC Article 725,
which addresses flame resistance and smoke emission for
signal cables.

Coaxial Cable—ARCNET
Use a 93 Ω coaxial cable (RG-62) for the Tracer Summit ARCNET link.
No other coaxial cable is supported.
You can order all ARCNET cables, adapters, crimp tools, stripper tools,
and other coaxial accessories from Trane.
For information about maximum cable length and maximum cable dis-
tance between two devices on a communication link, refer to Table 30 on
page 152.

Note:
Cable installations must comply with both federal and local codes.
Plenum-rated cable is available to meet NEC Article 725, which
addresses flame resistance and smoke emission for signal cables.

Fiber-Optic Cable—Ethernet and ARCNET


Use fiber-optic cable for applications involving long distances. There is lit-
tle degradation of optic signals when using fiber-optic cable, and the
integrity of the signal is maintained in the presence of several sources of
electrical noise including lightning, EMI/RFI, voltage conductors, and
ground loops.
Use a duplex, 62.5 µm core glass fiber-optic cable with ST connectors for
the Tracer Summit Ethernet or ARCNET link. There are a variety of
cables available for different applications including indoor, outdoor,
burial, aerial, and duct.
You can order fiber-optic cables, fiber-optic modems, ST type crimp con-
nectors, epoxy connectors, and other accessories from Trane.

BMTW-SVN01F-EN 7
Chapter 1 Before Installation

IMPORTANT
Due to the high precision required when performing fiber-optic termi-
nations, Trane recommends that only qualified technicians with the
proper equipment handle all terminations and splicing.

Note:
Use glass fiber-optic cable for long distances, interbuilding
cabling, and/or other areas of high electrical noise, such as petro-
chemical installations, electronic rooms, and near hospital NMR
or X-ray rooms.

Optical-Link Loss Budget


Every fiber-optic link has some signal loss (measured in decibels). Many
factors affect decibel loss, including:
• Length of fiber-optic cable
• Transmitter optical output power
• Operating wavelength
• Fiber attenuation
• Fiber bandwidth
• Receiver optical sensitivity
The decibel loss between any two devices is based on how well the termi-
nations or splices are made. The decibel loss can vary from 0.5 to 2 dB. A
clean splice results in increased performance. For example, the fiber-optic
ARCNET card that Trane supports has a power budget of 10 dB. The
decibel loss for fiber-optic cable provided by Trane is 3.75 dB/km
(1 km = 3280 ft). Precut fiber-optic cables and professionally spliced and/
or terminated cables should ensure minimal decibel loss.
To calculate the system loss, subtract the cable loss, splice loss, termina-
tor loss, and patch panel loss from the power budget. The example below
shows typical values for the ARCNET communication link:
power budget – system safety margin = available budget
10 dB – 3 dB = 7 dB (available budget)

available budget: 7 dB
cable loss: – 3.75 dB (1 km at 3.75 dB/km)
allowance for splice loss: – 1 dB (2 at .5 dB)
allowance for end connectors: – 1 dB (2 at .5 dB)
allowance for patch panel: – 1 dB (2 at .5 dB)
excess margin: = 0.25 dB

8 BMTW-SVN01F-EN
Remote Communication Requirements and Specifications

Remote Communication Requirements


and Specifications
The Tracer Summit BCU supports remote communication with a PC
Workstation. Remote communication requirements and specifications are
described in the following sections.

Communication Rate
The BCU supports a maximum communication rate of 33,600 bps.

Communication Protocol
Communication between the BCU and a PC Workstation is performed
using the BACnet point-to-point (PTP) protocol.

BCU Internal Modem


For remote communication, a single, internal modem card must be
installed in one of the BCU’s option card slots (see Figure 2 on page 4).
Trane reserves the right to support only specified modems, because
modem specifications are subject to change. This ensures proper opera-
tion and helps facilitate technical support if communication failures
occur.

Note:
You cannot install an EIA-232 communication card for BACnet
interface and an internal modem in the same Tracer Summit
BCU.

PC Workstation Modem
The Tracer Summit PC Workstation supports up to three internal or
external modems. (The resources available on any given PC Workstation
will dictate the number of modems able to be connected.) As with the
BCU internal modem, Trane reserves the right to support only those
modems specified. For a current list of specified modems, contact your
local Trane office.

BMTW-SVN01F-EN 9
Chapter 1 Before Installation

PC Workstation Requirements
The following sections specify hardware and software requirements and
recommendations for the PC Workstation. The hardware requirements
vary depending upon which add-on packages are included with Tracer
Summit.

Hardware Requirements for Tracer Summit Standard


Software, Tracer 100/Tracker Communications
Package, and Building Communications Package
The minimum hardware requirements for a PC Workstation running
Tracer Summit standard software, as well as the optional Tracer 100/
Tracker Communications Package or Building Communications Package,
are:
• Pentium 233 MHz processor
• 32 MB RAM for Windows 98 and Windows ME or 128 MB for Win-
dows XP, Windows 2000, and Windows NT
• 150 MB hard drive storage
• 4X CD-ROM drive for Windows 98, Windows ME, and Windows 2000;
8X CD-ROM for Windows XP and Windows NT; or 32X CD-ROM
needed to run the Tracer Summit Daily Operations Tutorial
• 15-inch SVGA monitor, 800 × 600 resolution, 16-bit color
• Mouse
• Keyboard
• Parallel port for printer
• 16-bit sound card with speakers
In addition, at least one of the following is required for establishing a
connection:
• One PCI or ISA slot (for Ethernet or ARCNET network adapter)
• One internal or external modem for remote workstation
(minimum 14.4 K baud)

Hardware Requirements for Tracer Summit Enterprise


Management Package
The Tracer Summit Enterprise Management Package requires the follow-
ing minimum hardware:
• Pentium 700 MHz processor
• 128 MB RAM
• 2 GB hard drive storage
• 56 K baud modem
All other components are the same as listed in the previous section for
Tracer Summit standard software.

10 BMTW-SVN01F-EN
Inspection Upon Receipt

Software Requirements
The PC Workstation must have the following software installed:
• Microsoft Windows 98, Windows ME, Windows NT 4.0 with Service
Pack 4, Windows XP, or Windows 2000
• Internet Explorer Version 5 or higher
• Microsoft Data Access Components (MDAC) Version 2.7 Service
Pack 1 or higher (this is usually automatically installed with
Microsoft Windows)

Inspection Upon Receipt


Tracer Summit BCUs ship pre-configured from the factory based on the
model number ordered. Refer to “Model Number Description” on page 12.
BCUs may include the following:
• Standard capacity card
• Optional high capacity card
• Internal card options
• UCM communication cards
• Optional local I/O module
• Optional BCU operator display
• All mounting accessories
The individual components are pre-installed in the BCU and are shipped
in the same package. Contact Trane for further information about the
BCU model number and individual part numbers. Also, see Figure 3 on
page 12.
A Tracer Summit PC Workstation package includes everything to run
Tracer Summit software. The package comes complete with the following:
• Tracer Summit software CD
• Complete set of Tracer Summit literature
You can order additional Tracer Summit PC Workstations and/or litera-
ture packages separately.
When unpacking these items, make sure that the documentation is not
lost or discarded with the packing material.
Although all items are inspected thoroughly before leaving the factory, it
is important to check them when they arrive at the job site to ensure that
the correct BCU panel was shipped and that no shipping damage
occurred. Use the Shipping Authorization papers to verify that all items
are present.
If the job site inspection reveals damage or material shortage:
1. Make the appropriate notation on the carrier’s delivery receipt.
2. Immediately file a claim with the carrier and specify the extent and
type of damage/shortage found.
3. Notify the appropriate Trane sales office representative.

BMTW-SVN01F-EN 11
Chapter 1 Before Installation

Model Number Description


All Trane products are identified by a multicharacter model number that
precisely identifies a unit. This number is located on the BCU nameplate.
The model number code for Tracer Summit systems is described in
Figure 3. Its use enables installing contractors, owner/operators, and ser-
vice technicians to determine components, operation, and options for a
particular system.

Figure 3. Model number example

BMTW1-4 0005-7 A8 A9 0A10,11 012 134513–16 A17 37818–20 021 122

1–4 Tracer Summit for Windows building management systems


5–7 Not used
8 Input power supply
A = 120 Vac/50,60/1
B = 120/240 Vac/50,60/1 for international
C = 240 Vac/50,60/1 for EC
D = 120 Vac/50,60/1 for UL-864-UUKL
9 Model
A = factory assigned
10,11 Design sequence
0A = factory assigned
12 BCU capacity
0 = standard capacity
1 = high capacity
13–16UCM communication cards
0 = none
1 = Comm2 (UCP1)
2 = Comm3 (PCM, TCM, Trane Europe chiller, RTA/RTW, SWUD, CGAS/CGWD, CCP)
3 = Comm3 non-isolated (VAV1, TRS panels)
4 = Comm4 (UCP2, UPCM, VAV II/III/IV, TUC, IntelliPak, Voyager)
5 = Comm5 (Tracer controllers and generic LonTalk® devices)
17 A = none
18–20Internal card options
0 = none
1 = ARCNET coax*
2 = ARCNET fiber*
3 = ARCNET hub 3 coax*
4 = ARCNET hub 1 fiber 2 coax*
5 = ARCNET hub 2 fiber 1 coax*
6 = EIA-232 port
7 = internal modem
8 = Ethernet card
*Not available with the EC version
21 Operator Display
0 = none
1 = Touch screen display
22 Local I/O module
0 = none
1 = 5 universal inputs/1 binary output

12 BMTW-SVN01F-EN
Storage

Storage
Tracer Summit BCU panels are designed for indoor installation only. If
you must store the panel at the job site before installation, make sure it is
stored indoors in a controlled environment. Acceptable storage tempera-
tures range from –50°F to 150°F (–46°C to 66°C), with a relative humidity
from 10% to 90%, noncondensing.

CAUTION
Avoid Equipment Damage!
Store the BCU cover and logic board off site until most or all building
construction is complete. Failure to do so could damage the BCU cover
and logic board.

Hardware Installation Checklist


This checklist summarizes the steps required to properly install Tracer
Summit system hardware. See specific chapters for detailed guidelines
and procedures.

Panel Placement (Chapter 2))


• Install the BCU in a controlled indoor environment, away from elec-
trical interference and vibration.
• Mount the BCU securely.
• Observe the recommended clearances.

Power Supply Wiring (Chapter 3)


• Be sure all electrical wiring complies with applicable codes.
• Connect the power supply wiring to the BCU.
• Check the power supply wiring for shorts.
• Inspect the BCU printed circuit card for any visible signs of damage.
• Check for proper LED operation.
• Install all warning labels.

Assignable Input Wiring (Chapter 3)


• Inspect all terminations at TB1 for binary and analog (universal)
inputs.
• Inspect the universal input jumper wiring for proper configuration.

UCM Wiring (Chapters 4 and 5)


• Inspect all UCM communication wiring between devices.
• Make sure all connections are shielded properly.
• Set/inspect the DIP switch settings for each UCM.

BMTW-SVN01F-EN 13
Chapter 1 Before Installation

Network Wiring (Chapter 6)


• Ensure all Ethernet or ARCNET and EIA-232 cards are installed and
addressed properly.
• Power up the BCU and observe the LEDs on the Ethernet or
ARCNET cards for proper operation.
• ARCNET LAN only: Ensure that the ARCNET card is going through
its power-up reconfiguration (recon) and is communicating with other
network devices. With the ARCNET cable connected, the green LED
should light steadily and the yellow LED should flash when data is
transmitted or received. If the green LED is flickering, the ARCNET
cable (or tee) either is not connected or is not working properly.

BCU Modem Installation (Chapter 7)


• Ensure that the internal modem card is installed and configured
properly.

14 BMTW-SVN01F-EN
Chapter 2

BCU Mounting and


Power Wiring

To install the Tracer Summit building control unit (BCU) at a job site,
mount the BCU to a wall and connect the ac-power wiring according to
the procedures described in the appropriate section:
• “BCU Mounting and Power Wiring for North American Installations”
below
• “BCU Mounting and Power Wiring for European Community Instal-
lations” on page 21
• “BCU Mounting and Power Wiring for International Installations” on
page 26
After you have mounted and wired the BCU, proceed to “Installing and
Wiring the BCU Logic Board” on page 31.
In addition, this chapter also describes several other procedures:
• “Installing and Removing the BCU Cover” on page 32
• “Installing the Optional Operator Display” on page 33

BCU Mounting and Power Wiring for


North American Installations
The BCU mounting procedure consists of selecting a location, verifying
conformance to BCU and clearance specifications, and securing the BCU
to a wall. The BCU wiring procedure consists of verifying compliance with
the BCU circuit requirements and then connecting the ac-power wires.

nCAUTION
Avoid Personal Injury!
Install the BCU only in the manner specified by Trane. Failure to do so
may result in personal injury and/or damage to equipment.

BCU Mounting for North American Installations


To mount a BCU:
1. Select a location.
2. Verify that the location conforms to BCU specifications.
3. Verify that the location conforms to clearance specifications for the
BCU.

BMTW-SVN01F-EN 15
Chapter 2 BCU Mounting and Power Wiring

4. Secure the BCU to the wall.


5. Install the optional operator display.

Select a Location
Select a location for the BCU that is in a corrosion-free, clean, indoor
environment. Consider both security and control wire lengths when mak-
ing the selection. The location should limit access to the BCU to operating
and service personnel.
To extend the life of the BCU electronic components, ensure that the
selected location avoids extreme operating conditions (including excessive
vibration) whenever possible.

CAUTION
Avoid Equipment Damage!
Install the BCU in a location that is out of direct sunlight. Failure to do
so may cause the BCU to overheat.

To avoid malfunctions caused by electrical interference, do not install the


BCU near high-power radio signals, electrical switching gear, power
buses, large motors, or other sources of electrical noise.

Verify Conformance to BCU Specifications


Ensure that the location conforms to BCU specifications. BCU specifica-
tions are shown in Table 1 and a dimensional drawing of a BCU is shown
in Figure 4 on page 17.

Table 1. Tracer Summit BCU Specifications


Dimensions
Height 19 in. (482 mm)
Width 16 in. (406 mm)
Depth 6 in. (152 mm)
Weight
Without operator display 15.0 lb (6.8 kg)
With operator display 17.5 lb (7.9 kg)
Operating environment
Temperature 32ºF to 120ºF (0 to 50ºC)
Humidity 10–90% noncondensing
Power requirements 98 –132 Vac, 5 A maximum, 1 phase

16 BMTW-SVN01F-EN
BCU Mounting and Power Wiring for North American Installations

Figure 4. Tracer Summit BCU Dimensions

BMTW-SVN01F-EN 17
Chapter 2 BCU Mounting and Power Wiring

Verify Conformance to Clearance Specifications


Make sure that the selected location provides enough space to accommo-
date the BCU minimum clearances (see Figure 5 on page 18). The clear-
ances are for ventilation, electrical conduit access, and sufficient human
access for the installing contractor, operator, and service technician:
• The top clearance allows for ventilation and entry of conduit for the
120 Vac power supply, low-voltage communications links, and
input/output wiring.
• The bottom clearance allows for the alternate entry of conduit for low-
voltage communication links and input/output wiring. It also allows
for ease of access while making wiring connections. In addition, the
bottom clearance specifies the optimum mounting height for BCUs
with operator displays.
• The left clearance allows for the alternate entry of conduit for the
120 Vac power entry.
• The right clearance allows for entry of conduit for low-voltage commu-
nication links and input/output wiring.
• The front clearance allows for operation and service access.

Figure 5. Tracer Summit BCU Minimum Clearances

Front view Side view

12 in.
(30 cm)

12 in. 12 in. 36 in.


(30 cm) (30 cm) (91 cm)

46 in.
(1.2 m)

18 BMTW-SVN01F-EN
BCU Mounting and Power Wiring for North American Installations

Secure the BCU to the Wall


After the installing contractor runs ac-power wiring, input wiring, and
communications wiring to the selected location, secure the BCU to the
wall:
1. Unpack the BCU shipping carton. The keys for the BCU are inside
the resin cover.
2. To avoid damage to the BCU logic board and resin front cover, store
them at another location during building construction.
3. On the wall, mark the location of the four mounting holes in the BCU
back panel.
4. Set the back panel aside and drill the mounting holes.
5. Secure the back panel to the wall with the ¼ in. (M6) hardware.

Install the Optional Operator Display


If you purchased the optional BCU operator display, refer to “Installing
the Optional Operator Display” on page 33, then proceed to “BCU Power
Wiring for North American Installations” below.

BCU Power Wiring for North American Installations


The BCU power wiring procedure consists of verifying compliance with
the BCU circuit requirements and then connecting the ac-power wires.
(See also “Preliminary AC-Power Checkout” on page 30.)

Verify Compliance with Circuit Requirements


To make sure that the BCU will operate properly, verify that the power
supply circuit is in compliance with these circuit requirements:
• The BCU must receive power from a dedicated power circuit. Failure
to comply may cause control malfunctions.
• The ac-power wire conduits or wire bundles must not contain
input/output wires. Failure to comply may cause the BCU to malfunc-
tion due to electrical noise.
• The ac-power wiring must comply with the National Electrical Code
(NEC) and applicable local electrical codes.
• The ac-power wiring requires three-wire 120 Vac service.

CAUTION
Use Copper Conductors Only!
Unit terminals are not designed to accept other types of conductors.
Failure to use copper conductors may result in equipment damage.

Note:
The BCU transformer voltage utilization range is 98–132 Vac
(120 Vac, nominal). The panel determines whether the current
is 50 or 60 cycle.

BMTW-SVN01F-EN 19
Chapter 2 BCU Mounting and Power Wiring

Connect the AC-Power Wires


To connect the ac-power wires to the BCU:

nWARNING
Hazardous Voltage!
Disconnect all electric power, including remote disconnects before ser-
vicing. Follow proper lockout/tagout procedures to ensure the power
can not be inadvertently energized. Failure to disconnect power before
servicing could result in death or serious injury.

1. Lock open the supply-power disconnect switch.

CAUTION
Avoid Equipment Damage!
Be careful when punching out the conduit knockout. Failure to do so
may cause damage to internal components.

2. At the upper left corner of the BCU, punch out either of the 7/8 in.
(22 mm) 120 Vac knockouts (see Figure 4 on page 17).
3. Access the power supply wiring by removing the BCU cover and the
block-off that covers the power supply area at the top of the BCU.
4. Connect the black 120 Vac hot (or other color wire that is not white or
green) to the top terminal block position (see Figure 6 on page 21).
5. Connect the white 120 Vac neutral wire to the middle terminal block
position.
6. Connect the green ground wire to the bottom terminal block position.
The ground wire should be continuous back to the circuit breaker
panel.
7. On a label, record the location of the circuit breaker panel and the
electrical circuit. Attach the label to the ac-power cover inside the
BCU.

20 BMTW-SVN01F-EN
BCU Mounting and Power Wiring for European Community Installations

CAUTION
4-Amp maximum set up tool receptacle
The SET UP TOOL ONLY receptacle must be used only to power a lap-
top PC service tool. The PC must not exceed a 4 A draw with a maxi-
mum acceptable leakage current of 3.4 mA.

Figure 6. Tracer Summit BCU Power Supply Wiring

SET UP TOOL ONLY

120 Vac hot (black)

120 Vac neutral (white)

Ground (green)
4 AMP MAX

BCU Mounting and Power Wiring for


European Community Installations
The BCU mounting procedure consists of selecting a location, verifying
conformance to BCU and clearance specifications, and securing the BCU
to a wall. The BCU wiring procedure consists of verifying compliance with
the BCU circuit requirements and then connecting the ac-power wires.

nCAUTION
Avoid Personal Injury!
Install the BCU only in the manner specified by Trane. Failure to do so
may result in personal injury and/or damage to equipment.

BCU Mounting for European Community Installations


To mount a BCU:
1. Select a location.
2. Verify that the location conforms to BCU specifications.
3. Verify that the location conforms to clearance specifications for the
BCU.
4. Secure the BCU to the wall.
5. Install the optional operator display.

BMTW-SVN01F-EN 21
Chapter 2 BCU Mounting and Power Wiring

Select a Location
Select a location for the BCU that is in a corrosion-free, clean, indoor
environment. Consider both security and control wire lengths when mak-
ing the selection. The location should limit access to the BCU to operating
and service personnel.
To extend the life of the BCU electronic components, ensure that the
selected location avoids extreme operating conditions (including excessive
vibration) whenever possible.

CAUTION
Avoid Equipment Damage!
Install the BCU in a location that is out of direct sunlight. Failure to do
so may cause the BCU to overheat.

To avoid malfunctions caused by electrical interference, do not install the


BCU near high-power radio signals, electrical switching gear, power
buses, large motors, or other sources of electrical noise.

Verify Conformance to BCU Specifications


Ensure that the location conforms to BCU specifications. BCU specifica-
tions are shown in Table 2. A dimensional drawing of a BCU is shown in
Figure 4 on page 17.

Table 2. Tracer Summit BCU Specifications


Dimensions
Height 482 mm
Width 406 mm
Depth 152 mm
Weight
Without operator display 6.8 kg
With operator display 7.9 kg
Operating environment
Temperature 0 to 50ºC
Humidity 10–90% noncondensing
Altitude Less than 2000 m
Installation Category 3
Pollution Degree 2

22 BMTW-SVN01F-EN
BCU Mounting and Power Wiring for European Community Installations

Table 2. Tracer Summit BCU Specifications (Continued)


Power requirements 196–264 Vac
5 A maximum, 1 phase, 50 or 60 Hz
EMC/safety compliance
FCC Class A
IEC 1000-4-2 4 kV CD, 8 kV AD
IEC 1000-4-3 10 V/m
IEC 1000-4-4 2 kV (power lines), 1 kV (signal lines)
IEC 1000-4-6 10 V
IEC 1000-4-8 30 A/m
EN 61010-1
CE marking
UL 916 listed
Low-voltage directive 73/23/EEC
EMC directive 89/336/EEC

Verify Conformance to Clearance Specifications


Make sure that the selected location provides enough space to accommo-
date the BCU minimum clearances (see Figure 5 on page 18). The clear-
ances are for ventilation, electrical conduit access, and sufficient human
access for the installing contractor, operator, and service technician:
• The top clearance allows for ventilation and entry of conduit for the
230 Vac power supply, low-voltage communications links, and
input/output wiring.
• The bottom clearance allows for the alternate entry of conduit for low-
voltage communication links and input/output wiring. It also allows
for ease of access while making wiring connections. In addition, the
bottom clearance specifies the optimum mounting height for BCUs
with operator displays.
• The left clearance allows for the alternate entry of conduit for the
230 Vac power entry.
• The right clearance allows for entry of conduit for low-voltage commu-
nication links and input/output wiring.
• The front clearance allows for operation and service access.

Secure the BCU to the Wall


After the installing contractor runs ac-power wiring, input wiring, and
communications wiring to the selected location, secure the BCU to the
wall:
1. Unpack the BCU shipping carton. The keys for the BCU are inside
the resin cover.
2. To avoid damage to the BCU logic board and resin front cover, store
them at another location during building construction.
3. On the wall, mark the location of the four mounting holes in the BCU
back panel.
4. Set the back panel aside and drill the mounting holes.

BMTW-SVN01F-EN 23
Chapter 2 BCU Mounting and Power Wiring

5. Secure the back panel to the wall with the 1/4 in. (M6) hardware.

Install the Optional Operator Display


If you purchased the optional BCU operator display, refer to “Installing
the Optional Operator Display” on page 33, then proceed to “BCU Power
Wiring for European Community Installations” on page 24.

BCU Power Wiring for European Community


Installations
The BCU power wiring procedure consists of verifying compliance with
the BCU circuit requirements and then connecting the ac-power wires.
(See also “Preliminary AC-Power Checkout” on page 30.)

Verify Compliance with Circuit Requirements


To make sure that the BCU will operate properly, verify that the power
supply circuit is in compliance with these circuit requirements:
• The BCU must receive power from a dedicated power circuit. Failure
to comply may cause control malfunctions.
• The BCU must be protected by an 8–10 A circuit breaker. Locate the
breaker near the BCU, since it is the BCU disconnect switch.
• The ac-power wire conduits or wire bundles must not contain
input/output wires. Failure to comply may cause the BCU to malfunc-
tion due to electrical noise.
• The ac-power wiring must comply with applicable national and local
electrical codes.
• The ac-power wiring requires three-wire 230 Vac service. Use solid,
1.63 mm2, copper conductors only. Do not use stranded wire.

CAUTION
Use Copper Conductors Only!
Unit terminals are not designed to accept other types of conductors.
Failure to use copper conductors may result in equipment damage.

Note:
The BCU transformer voltage utilization range is 196–264 Vac
(230 Vac, nominal). The panel determines if the current is 50 or
60 cycle.

24 BMTW-SVN01F-EN
BCU Mounting and Power Wiring for European Community Installations

Connect the AC-Power Wires


To connect the ac-power wires to the BCU:

nWARNING
Hazardous Voltage!
Disconnect all electric power, including remote disconnects before ser-
vicing. Follow proper lockout/tagout procedures to ensure the power
can not be inadvertently energized. Failure to disconnect power before
servicing could result in death or serious injury.

1. Lock open the supply-power disconnect switch.

CAUTION
Avoid Equipment Damage!
Be careful when punching out the conduit knockout. Failure to do so
may cause damage to internal components.

2. At the upper left corner of the BCU, punch out either of the 22 mm
230 Vac knockouts (see Figure 4 on page 17).
3. Access the power supply wiring by removing the BCU cover and the
block-off that covers the power supply area at the top of the BCU.
4. Connect the blue 230 Vac wire to the top terminal block position (see
Figure 7 on page 26).
5. Connect the brown 230 Vac wire to the bottom terminal block posi-
tion.
6. Connect the green ground wire to the ground lug. The ground wire
should be continuous back to the circuit breaker panel.
7. On a label, record the location of the circuit breaker panel and the
electrical circuit. Attach the label to the ac-power cover inside the
BCU.

BMTW-SVN01F-EN 25
Chapter 2 BCU Mounting and Power Wiring

CAUTION
4-Amp maximum service tool receptacle
The SERVICE TOOL ONLY receptacle must only be used to power a lap-
top PC service tool. The PC must not exceed a 4 A draw with a maxi-
mum acceptable leakage current of 3.4 mA.

Figure 7. Tracer Summit BCU Power Supply Wiring

SERVICE TOOL ONLY

230 Vac (blue)

230 Vac (brown)

! 4 AMP MAX
Ground (green)

Ground lug

BCU Mounting and Power Wiring for


International Installations
The BCU mounting procedure consists of selecting a location, verifying
conformance to BCU and clearance specifications, and securing the BCU
to a wall. The BCU wiring procedure consists of verifying compliance with
the BCU circuit requirements and then connecting the ac-power wires.

BCU Mounting for International Installations


To mount a BCU:
1. Select a location.
2. Verify that the location conforms to BCU specifications.
3. Verify that the location conforms to clearance specifications for the
BCU.
4. Secure the BCU to the wall.
5. Install the optional operator display.

Select a Location
Select a location for the BCU that is in a corrosion-free, clean, indoor
environment. Consider both security and control wire lengths when mak-
ing the selection. The location should limit access to the BCU to operating
and service personnel.

26 BMTW-SVN01F-EN
BCU Mounting and Power Wiring for International Installations

To extend the life of the BCU electronic components, ensure that the
selected location avoids extreme operating conditions (including excessive
vibration) whenever possible.

CAUTION
Avoid Equipment Damage!
Install the BCU in a location that is out of direct sunlight. Failure to do
so may cause the BCU to overheat.

To avoid malfunctions caused by electrical interference, do not install the


BCU near high-power radio signals, electrical switching gear, power
buses, large motors, or other sources of electrical noise.

Verify Conformance to BCU Specifications


Ensure that the location conforms to BCU specifications. BCU specifica-
tions are shown in Table 3 and a dimensional drawing of a BCU is shown
in Figure 4 on page 17.

Table 3. Tracer Summit BCU Specifications


Dimensions
Height 482 mm (19 in.)
Width 406 mm (16 in.)
Depth 152 mm (6 in.)
Weight
Without operator display 6.8 kg (15.0 lb)
With operator display 7.9 kg (17.5 lb)
Operating environment
Temperature 0ºC to 50ºC (32ºF to 120ºF)
Humidity 10–90% noncondensing
Power requirements Switch selectable for 98–132 Vac or
196–264 Vac, 5 A maximum, 1 phase,
50 or 60 Hz

Verify Conformance to Clearance Specifications


Make sure that the selected location provides enough space to accommo-
date the BCU minimum clearances (see Figure 5 on page 18). The clear-
ances are for ventilation, electrical conduit access, and sufficient human
access for the installing contractor, operator, and service technician:
• The top clearance allows for ventilation and entry of conduit for the
120/240 Vac power supply, low-voltage communications links, and
input/output wiring.
• The bottom clearance allows for the alternate entry of conduit for low-
voltage communication links and input/output wiring. It also allows
for ease of access while making wiring connections. In addition, the
bottom clearance specifies the optimum mounting height for BCUs
with operator displays.

BMTW-SVN01F-EN 27
Chapter 2 BCU Mounting and Power Wiring

• The left clearance allows for the alternate entry of conduit for the
120/240 Vac power entry.
• The right clearance allows for entry of conduit for low-voltage commu-
nication links and input/output wiring.
• The front clearance allows for operation and service access.

Secure the BCU to the Wall


After the installing contractor runs ac-power wiring, input wiring, and
communications wiring to the selected location, secure the BCU to the
wall:
1. Unpack the BCU shipping carton. The keys for the BCU are inside
the resin cover.
2. To avoid damage to the BCU logic board and resin front cover, store
them at another location during building construction.
3. On the wall, mark the location of the four mounting holes in the BCU
back panel.
4. Set the back panel aside and drill the mounting holes.
5. Secure the back panel to the wall with the M6 (¼ in.) hardware.

Install the Optional Operator Display


If you purchased the optional BCU operator display, refer to “Installing
the Optional Operator Display” on page 33, then proceed to “BCU Power
Wiring for International Installations” below.

BCU Power Wiring for International Installations


The BCU power wiring procedure consists of verifying compliance with
the BCU circuit requirements and then connecting the ac-power wires.
(See also “Preliminary AC-Power Checkout” on page 30.)

Verify Compliance with Circuit Requirements


To make sure that the BCU will operate properly, verify that the power
supply circuit is in compliance with these circuit requirements:
• The BCU must receive power from a dedicated power circuit. Failure
to comply may cause control malfunctions.
• The ac-power wire conduits or wire bundles must not contain
input/output wires. Failure to comply may cause the BCU to malfunc-
tion due to electrical noise.

28 BMTW-SVN01F-EN
BCU Mounting and Power Wiring for International Installations

• The ac-power wiring must comply with the National Electrical Code
(NEC) and applicable local electrical codes.
• The ac-power wiring requires three-wire 120/240 Vac service. Use
copper conductors only.

CAUTION
Use Copper Conductors Only!
Unit terminals are not designed to accept other types of conductors.
Failure to use copper conductors may result in equipment damage.

Note:
The BCU transformer voltage utilization range is 98–132 Vac
(120 Vac, nominal) or 196–264 Vac (240 Vac, nominal). The
panel determines whether the current is 50 or 60 cycle.

Connect the AC-Power Wires


To connect the ac-power wires to the BCU:

nWARNING
Hazardous Voltage!
Disconnect all electric power, including remote disconnects before ser-
vicing. Follow proper lockout/tagout procedures to ensure the power
can not be inadvertently energized. Failure to disconnect power before
servicing could result in death or serious injury.

1. Lock open the supply-power disconnect switch.

CAUTION
Avoid Equipment Damage!
Be careful when punching out the conduit knockout. Failure to do so
may cause damage to internal components.

2. At the upper left corner of the BCU, punch out either of the 22 mm
(7/8 in.) 120/240 Vac knockouts (see Figure 8 on page 30).
3. Access the power supply wiring by removing the BCU cover and the
block-off that covers the power supply area at the top of the BCU.
4. Set the line voltage switch to match the supply voltage (120–240 Vac).
5. For 120 Vac, connect the black wire (or other color wire that is not
white or green) to the top terminal block position (see Figure 8 on
page 30). Then connect the white wire to the middle terminal block
position.
6. For 240 Vac, connect the black wire (or other color wire that is not
white or green) to the top and middle terminal block positions.

BMTW-SVN01F-EN 29
Chapter 2 BCU Mounting and Power Wiring

7. Connect the green ground wire to the bottom terminal block position.
The ground wire should be continuous back to the circuit breaker
panel.
8. On a label, record the location of the circuit breaker panel and the
electrical circuit. Attach the label to the ac-power cover inside the
BCU.

CAUTION
4-Amp maximum set up tool receptacle
The SET UP TOOL ONLY receptacle must only be used to power a lap-
top PC service tool. The PC must not exceed a 4 A draw with a maxi-
mum acceptable leakage current of 3.4 mA.

Figure 8. Tracer Summit BCU Power Supply Wiring

120/240 Vac (colored wire, but not white or green)


120/240 Vac (for 120 Vac, white wire;
for 240 Vac, colored wire, but not white or green)

Ground (green wire)

Preliminary AC-Power Checkout


nWARNING
Live Electrical Components!
During installation, testing, servicing and troubleshooting of this prod-
uct, it may be necessary to work with live electrical components. Have
a qualified licensed electrician or other individual who has been prop-
erly trained in handling live electrical components perform these tasks.
Failure to follow all electrical safety precautions when exposed to live
electrical components could result in death or serious injury.

1. After completing the power connections to the 120/240 Vac power


supply but before applying power to the panel, turn the BCU power
switch S1 to off. (For switch location, see Figure 2 on page 4.)

30 BMTW-SVN01F-EN
Installing and Wiring the BCU Logic Board

2. Make sure that all internal connections are secure, then check for ac
or dc voltages for safety purposes. For BCU input power wiring and
internal cable connections, see Figure 2 on page 4.
3. Check for ac and dc shorts to ground by disconnecting all power to the
BCU and measuring the resistance between the hot and neutral leads
on the 120/240 Vac power supply. The proper resistance reading
should be 33 Ω (5 Ω with an optional 24 Vac transformer).
4. Energize the BCU power supply circuit, and then check the voltage
between each pair of wires on the ac-power termination block. The
voltages measured should match the values in Table 4.
Table 4. BCU Power Supply Voltages

Power Voltages

120 Vac • 98–132 Vac between black wire and white wire
• Less than 5 Vac between white wire and ground
• 98–132 Vac between black wire and ground
240 Vac • 196–264 Vac between black wire and orange wire
• 98–132 Vac between orange wire and ground
• 98–132 Vac between black wire and ground

5. De-energize the BCU power supply circuit by opening the circuit


breaker at the power distribution circuit breaker panel.
6. Reinstall the block-off cover over the power supply area in the BCU
enclosure.

Installing and Wiring the BCU Logic


Board
The BCU logic board assembly is shipped in its own packaging so that it
can be stored in a safe location while construction or electrical wiring is in
progress. After all ac-power wiring is complete, mount and wire the BCU
logic board assembly.

CAUTION
Possible Equipment Damage!
The BCU logic board should be installed only after building construc-
tion or electrical wiring is at a point when there is no risk of damaging
the electronics of the logic board.

To install and wire the logic board:


1. Remove the BCU logic board assembly from the packaging material.
2. Inspect the applicable unit control module (UCM) communication
card(s) to make sure that the communication options are as ordered.

BMTW-SVN01F-EN 31
Chapter 2 BCU Mounting and Power Wiring

3. Check card locations to assure they are in the communication module


slot(s) corresponding to UCM communication link wiring on TB1.
4. Locate the four snap-clip receptors on the BCU metal back panel and
align with the four snap clips on the BCU logic board assembly.
5. Firmly press the two upper snap clips, then the two lower snap clips,
on to the receptors. Make sure the BCU logic board assembly is fully
secured to the BCU back panel.
6. With the ac power off, connect the plug from the power transformer to
TB1 on the upper right corner of the BCU board card.

BCU Warning Labels


A supply of warning labels (form number X39001257-01) is shipped with
each BCU (see Figure 9). Use these labels to warn operating, mainte-
nance, and service personnel about the potential hazards associated with
automatically controlled equipment.
Before making any control wiring connections, place one or more labels in
conspicuous locations on each piece of controlled equipment.

Figure 9. BCU warning label

Installing and Removing the BCU Cover


The BCU has a resin cover that protects the internal components from
damage. The cover slips easily onto the BCU metal back panel and locks
for security purposes.

32 BMTW-SVN01F-EN
Installing the Optional Operator Display

To install the BCU cover:


1. Locate the four mounting rivets on the BCU metal back panel.
2. Align the slots on the cover with the four rivets on the back panel.
3. Slide the cover onto the rivets. Then, push downward to lock into
place.
4. Turn the key (located below the BCU panel) to lock the cover in place.
5. Remove the key and store in a safe, secure place.
Reverse these steps to remove the BCU cover.

Installing the Optional Operator Display


If you purchased the optional BCU operator display, the following steps
show you how to install it. These same steps apply if the BCU and opera-
tor display were shipped at the same time or if you are adding the opera-
tor display to a previously installed BCU.
To install the operator display:
1. Remove the front cover from the BCU.
2. Remove the four screws that are holding in the two panel inserts on
the front cover of the BCU (see Figure 10).

Figure 10. Removing the two panel inserts

3. Remove the front panel inserts from the front cover.

BMTW-SVN01F-EN 33
Chapter 2 BCU Mounting and Power Wiring

4. Ensure that the BCU has been mounted in the recommended location
and at the recommended height as shown in Figure 5 on page 18.

Note:
If the BCU is not installed as recommended, you may not be
able to view and use the operator display most effectively.

5. Ensure that the BCU is a BMTW model manufactured after July 1,


2000, and has a serial number greater than E00G5000.

Note:
If the BCU was manufactured before the indicated date, the
BCU logic board will not have the P13 operator display socket.

6. Make sure the power to the BCU is off.

CAUTION
Possible Equipment Damage!
Failure to turn off power may result in damage to internal components.

7. Attach one end of the ribbon cable into P2, the 10-pin socket located
at the top of the operator display circuit board.

Note:
The 10-pin plug on each end of the ribbon cable has a “polariz-
ing key” to prevent improper installation of the ribbon cable.
Align this polarizing key with the slot in the 10-pin socket.

Note:
When installed, the plug on one end of the ribbon cable routes
the cable away from the circuit board while the plug on the
other end routes the ribbon cable toward the circuit board. Use
the end that routes the ribbon cable away from the circuit
board.

8. Locate the small manila envelope that shipped with the BCU opera-
tor display. This envelope contains four 8 mm M4 screws and star
washers.
9. Thread one screw into the threaded hole on the upper-left side of the
BCU chassis (see Figure 11 on page 35). Do not completely tighten
the screw.

34 BMTW-SVN01F-EN
Installing the Optional Operator Display

Figure 11. Operator display screw hole locations

10. Thread another screw into the hole in the upper right side of the BCU
chassis. Do not completely tighten the screw.
11. Hook the BCU operator display assembly onto these two screws.
12. Thread the remaining two screws into the lower- left and lower-right
corners of the operator display.
13. Tighten all four screws.
14. Attach the loose end of the ribbon cable into P13, the 10-pin operator
display socket located on the BCU logic board (see Figure 12 on
page 36).

Note:
Align the polarizing key on the ribbon cable with the slot in the
operator display socket.

BMTW-SVN01F-EN 35
Chapter 2 BCU Mounting and Power Wiring

Figure 12. Operator display socket

Operator display socket

Note:
The operator display emits a beep every 10 minutes if the oper-
ator display is powered up and either the BCU is not configured
or communication has been lost between the BCU and the oper-
ator display. Therefore, if you are installing the operator dis-
play on a BCU that has not been configured, the operator
display will beep. You may want to wait to power up the opera-
tor display until the BCU has been configured. To do so, simply
keep the ribbon cable disconnected from the P13 operator dis-
play socket on the BCU logic board.

IMPORTANT
The operator display will not function properly if the mini-monitor is
plugged into P6 on the BCU logic board. (The mini-monitor is software
and cabling that allows you to view BCU information on an attached
PC.) If you need to attach the mini-monitor cable, first unplug the oper-
ator display from the P13 operator display socket on the BCU logic
board.

36 BMTW-SVN01F-EN
Chapter 3

BCU I/O Module

The BCU input/output (I/O) module is an optional board that adds capa-
bilities for five universal inputs (UIPs) and one binary output (BOP) to
the BCU.
Each UIP can be configured for any of the following:
• Binary (switches or outputs)
• Current (0–20 mA)
• Pulse meter (water, gas, and electric)
• Temperature sensor (Trane thermistors)
• Voltage (0–10 Vdc) inputs
Both the hardware jumper selection and the software configuration set
the UIP type.
A BOP has been included in the BCU I/O module to provide a convenient
single output. The BOP can be used to control equipment or provide sta-
tus information such as an alarm condition.

BCU I/O Module Installation


Install the BCU I/O module into the BCU enclosure. Refer to Figure 2 on
page 4 for BCU I/O module installation location. Two posts and two
screws secure the board into the back of the enclosure.
A RJ45 cable is provided to connect the BCU I/O module to the BCU.
Refer to Figure 2 on page 4 for RJ45 connector locations and cable dia-
gram. The BCU will communicate with and provide power to the BCU I/O
module through this cable.

I/O Wiring
All wiring must conform to national and local electrical codes. Analog wir-
ing should not exceed a run length of 300 ft (91 m). Binary wiring should
not exceed a length of 1,000 ft (305 m). If the recommended lengths are
exceeded, the wire may pick up EMI/RFI, which would affect operation of
the BCU I/O module.
For input and output wiring, Trane recommends using a plenum wire
that is 18–22 AWG (1.02–0.643 mm2) shielded, twisted-pair wire. Each
conductor is stranded, tinned copper. Only one end of the shielded wire
should be grounded. At the BCU end, connect the wire’s shield to the neg-
ative lead input. On the other end of the wire, cut back and tape the
shielding.

BMTW-SVN01F-EN 37
Chapter 3 BCU I/O Module

Both input wiring and output wiring are connected to the terminal block
TB1 on the BCU I/O module. The five UIPs are labeled UIP1 through
UIP5. The BOP is labeled BOP1. The BCU I/O module also has a 24 Vac
(100 mA) output to power transmitting devices. Odd numbered terminals
on TB1 are positive leads, and even numbered terminals are negative
leads, except for TB1-14. For current or voltage devices, always connect
the positive wire to positive leads and the negative wire to negative leads.
Refer to Figure 13 for terminal locations on TB1.

Figure 13. UIP Terminal and Jumper Locations

38 BMTW-SVN01F-EN
I/O Wiring

Table 5. Jumper Configurations, Operating Ranges, and Circuit Characteristics for Input Device Types

UIP1 (TB1-3 and TB1-4)

Input Device Jumper Pins on P10 Operating Range Circuit Characteristics

Binary/Pulse meter 2 and 3 10 mA, 10 V < 50 Ω = switches closed


> 1,000 Ω = switches open
Thermistor 1 and 2 –30°F to 220°F 10,000 Ω = 77°F (25°C)
(–34°C to 104°C)
Current 5 and 6 0–20 mA Input impedance < 500 Ω
Voltage 4 and 5 0–10 Vdc Input impedance > 500 Ω

UIP2 (TB1-5 and TB1-6)

Input Device Jumper Pins on P11 Operating Range Circuit Characteristics

Binary/Pulse meter 2 and 3 10 mA, 10 V < 50 Ω = switches closed


> 1,000 Ω = switches open
Thermistor 1 and 2 –30°F to 220°F 10,000 Ω = 77°F (25°C)
(–34°C to 104°C)
Current 5 and 6 0–20 mA Input impedance < 500 Ω
Voltage 4 and 5 0–10 Vdc Input impedance > 500 Ω

UIP3 (TB1-7 and TB1-8)

Input Device Jumper Pins on P12 Operating Range Circuit Characteristics

Binary/Pulse meter 2 and 3 10 mA, 10 V < 50 Ω = switches closed


> 1,000 Ω = switches open
Thermistor 1 and 2 –30°F to 220°F 10,000 Ω = 77°F (25°C)
(–34°C to 104°C)
Current 5 and 6 0–20 mA Input impedance < 500 Ω
Voltage 4 and 5 0–10 Vdc Input impedance > 500 Ω

UIP4 (TB1-9 and TB1-10)

Input Device Jumper Pins on P13 Operating Range Circuit Characteristics

Binary/Pulse meter 2 and 3 10 mA, 10 V < 50 Ω = switches closed


> 1,000 Ω = switches open
Thermistor 1 and 2 –30°F to 220°F 10,000 Ω = 77°F (25°C)
(–34°C to 104°C)
Current 5 and 6 0–20 mA Input impedance < 500 Ω
Voltage 4 and 5 0–10 Vdc Input impedance > 500 Ω

BMTW-SVN01F-EN 39
Chapter 3 BCU I/O Module

Table 5. Jumper Configurations, Operating Ranges, and Circuit Characteristics for Input Device Types

UIP5 (TB1-11 and TB1-12)

Input Device Jumper Pins on P14 Operating Range Circuit Characteristics

Binary/Pulse meter 2 and 3 10 mA, 10 V < 50 Ω = switches closed


> 1,000 Ω = switches open
Thermistor 1 and 2 –30°F to 220°F 10,000 Ω = 77°F (25°C)
(–34°C to 104°C)
Current 5 and 6 0–20 mA Input impedance < 500 Ω
Voltage 4 and 5 0–10 Vdc Input impedance > 500 Ω

Hardware UIP Selection


Each UIP has a set of hardware jumpers. Use the hardware jumpers on
the BCU I/O module to specify the input device type that the UIPs will be
configured for. The five UIP jumper sets are labeled UIP1 through UIP5.
Refer to Figure 13 on page 38 for jumper locations. Table 5 on page 39
lists input device types for each UIP along with their corresponding
jumper configurations, operating ranges, and circuit characteristics.

Binary/Pulse Meter Configured UIPs


Binary and pulse meter devices connected to binary configured UIPs
must be isolated and have ungrounded contacts. Binary hardware that
can be used includes momentary contact switches (normally open), stan-
dard (maintained) switches, and pulse metered devices (gas, water, or
electric).
Common devices are enthalpy switches, differential-pressure airflow
switches, system shutdown switches, remote alarms, photocell, gas
meters, water meters, and electrical demand meters.
For pulse meter devices, the closure pulse rate may range from 0 to 4 Hz.
On a contact closure, the minimum contact dwell time must last at least
125 ms for the closure to be recognized by the input.
For all UIPs in the BCU I/O module, you must create and set up the nec-
essary objects that will provide units, calculation, and alarming to the
desired input. Refer to the System Programming guide for creating and
setting up the necessary objects.

40 BMTW-SVN01F-EN
Thermistor Configured UIPs

Thermistor Configured UIPs


For thermistor configured UIPs, only a resistance thermistor tempera-
ture sensor (from –30°F to 220°F [–34°C to 104°C]) can be connected to
the input. Table 6 displays the sensor resistance values for thermistors.

Table 6. Sensor Resistance Values for Thermistors

Temperature Thermistor
(Fahrenheit) (ohms)

–30 241,071
–20 170,041
–10 121,326
0 87,511
10 63,769
20 46,919
30 34,839
40 26,221
50 19,955
60 15,333
70 11,889
80 9,298
90 7,330
100 5,824
125 3,382
150 2,049
175 1,296
200 837
220 600

BMTW-SVN01F-EN 41
Chapter 3 BCU I/O Module

Figure 14 shows the typical wiring diagram to a Trane temperature sen-


sor with cancel and timed override buttons. There are two properties that
will show whether the cancel or timed override buttons have been
selected (turned on for 2 minutes). Note the polarity of the connections to
the sensor.

Figure 14. Temperature Sensor Wiring Diagram

For all UIPs in the BCU I/O module, you must create and set up the nec-
essary objects that will provide units, calculation, and alarming to the
desired input. Refer to the Tracer Summit System Programming guide for
creating and setting up the necessary objects.

Current and Voltage Configured UIPs


UIPs can be set up for either current or voltage input for transmitting
and sensor devices that are either current or voltage sources. For current
sources, the input can handle a range from 0–20 mA. The current source
must be able to drive 200 Ω. For voltage sources, the input can handle a
range from 0–10 Vdc. The voltage source must be able to drive 9000 Ω.
The BCU I/O module provides a 24 Vdc (100 mA) power supply output for
transmitting devices that require an external dc-power supply. Refer to
Figure 15 on page 43 for a wiring diagram on how to connect the power
supply to a transmitting device and an input.

Note:
The 24 Vdc power supply shares a common negative input with
the UIPs. This eliminates the need to connect a 24 Vdc negative
power output to the negative input of the UIP.

42 BMTW-SVN01F-EN
Binary Output

Figure 15. Transmitting Device to Power Supply Wiring Diagram

For all UIPs in the BCU I/O module, you must create and set up the nec-
essary objects that will provide units, calculation, and alarming to the
desired input. Refer to the Tracer Summit System Programming guide for
creating and setting up the necessary objects.

Binary Output
A single triac powered binary output is available for use. The triac
accepts loads up to 500 mA at 24 Vdc. Refer to Figure 13 on page 38 for
the location of the binary output, which is labeled BOP1.
For the binary output on the BCU I/O module, you must create and setup
a binary output object that will control this output. Refer to the Tracer
Summit System Programming guide for creating and setting up binary
objects.

BMTW-SVN01F-EN 43
Chapter 3 BCU I/O Module

44 BMTW-SVN01F-EN
Chapter 4

UCM Communication-Link
Wiring

Communication Links
Unit control module (UCM) communication links are used to connect
UCMs to the BCU. Each BCU has four communication card slots and can
have up to four UCM communication links. You can configure each link
with any one of the five types of UCM communication cards.
The types and quantities of UCMs that you can link to standard capacity
and high capacity BCUs are shown in Table 7 on page 46. BCU capacity
is determined by whether just the standard capacity module is installed
or both the standard and high capacity modules are installed in a BCU.

BMTW-SVN01F-EN 45
Chapter 4 UCM Communication-Link Wiring

Table 7. UCMs Linked to BCU


Standard Capacity BCU High Capacity BCU
Communication-Link Maximum Maximum Maximum Maximum
UCM Device
Type Devices per Quantity Devices per Quantity
Link per BCU Link per BCU
Comm2 UCP1 3 3 3 6
Isolated Comm3 CSC 10 10 20 20
LCP* 4* 4* 8* 8*
PCM 15 15 30 30
RTA-RTW 5 5 10 10
Scroll chiller (CGA/CGW/CGAF) 5 5 10† 10
TCM 30 30 60 60
Trane Europe chiller 5 5 10 10
VariTrac II CCP 6 12 6 24
Voyager 16 16 32 32
Non-isolated Comm3 TRS 8‡ 8‡ 8‡ 8‡
VAV I 63 126 63 189
Comm4 Horizon absorption chiller 5 5 10 10
IntelliPak 10 10 20 20
TUC 64 128 64 192
UCP2 5 5 10 10
UPCM 5 5 10 10
VAV II/III/IV 63 126 63 189
VAV wireless receiver 8 8 8 8
Voyager 16 16 32 32
Comm5 Tracer loop controller 1 1 1 1
Discharge air controller (DAC)*** 10 10 20 20
Tracer MP580 and Tracer MP581 con- 10 10 20 20
trollers
Space comfort controller (SCC)*** 120** 120** 120** 120**
Generic LonTalk® device (GLD) 20 20 40 40
N/A BCU I/O module 1 1 1 1
* Requires an LCP Supervisor on each link (where LCPs are connected) to act as an interface/translator.
† Some models of CGAF chillers are currently limited to addresses 49–54, which limits the maximum number of devices per link

to 6.
‡ The number of TRS panels supported in a BCU is a function of the number of binary and analog objects defined. Make sure that

the BCU is properly sized (refer to BAS-PRB005-EN, Building Control Unit Sizing for Version 13 Tracer Summit Systems). TRSs
must be configured on communication link 1. TRSs cannot coexist with other UCM types on the same communication link. The
non-isolated Comm3 link must be dedicated solely to the TRS interface and can be located only on communication link 1.
** A maximum of 60 devices per link can be accommodated. With a repeater, the maximum number is increased to 120.
*** For a complete list of controllers, see Chapter 5, Comm5 section.

46 BMTW-SVN01F-EN
UCM Communication Cards

The locations of the UCM communication links on the BCU logic board
are illustrated in Figure 16.

Figure 16. UCM Communication-Link Locations

UCM Communication Cards


Five types of UCM communication cards are available. Each card sup-
ports a separate link of UCMs that are scanned continuously. These five
UCM communication card types are available for various communication
protocols.
These cards fit into modules P2, P3, P4, P5 on the BCU logic board and
can be arranged in any order. The BCU is shipped with these cards in
place, and they are preconfigured according to the model number as
ordered. The types of cards are as follows:
• Cards that fit into module P2 use the UCM communication link #1
located on terminals TB2-1, TB2-2, and TB2-3.
• Cards that fit into module P3 use the UCM communication link #2
located on terminals TB2-4, TB2-5, and TB2-6.
• Cards that fit into module P4 use the UCM communication link #3
located on terminals TB2-7, TB2-8, and TB2-9.
• Cards that fit into module P5 use the UCM communication link #4
located on terminals TB2-10, TB2-11, and TB2-12.
The five communication card options are described in the following sections.

BMTW-SVN01F-EN 47
Chapter 4 UCM Communication-Link Wiring

Comm2 Card
This card is used for UCP1 communication. It is the isolated link for use
with UCP1 chillers (CVHE, CVAD, RTHA, and CVHB). These are the
same chillers that previously connected to Tracer 100 series systems
through the system control panel (SCP). The use of an SCP is not
required nor is it supported for Tracer Summit installations. A maximum
of two of these cards per BCU can be used.
Note the color of the card (red), the numbers on the label, and the physi-
cal characteristics of the card as shown in Figure 17.

Figure 17. Comm2 UCM Communication Card

Figure Note:
Trane part number 4020 0905
Card identification tag: 50100756
Service part number: BRD0935

48 BMTW-SVN01F-EN
UCM Communication Cards

Isolated Comm3 Card


This card is used for CSC, LCP, PCM, TCM, Trane Europe chiller, Vari-
Trac II Central Control Panel, RTA-RTW, CGA/CGW chiller, and Voy-
ager communications. A maximum of four of these cards per BCU can be
used.
Note the color of the card (green), the numbers on the label, and the phys-
ical characteristics of the card as shown in Figure 18.

Figure 18. Isolated Comm3 UCM Communication Card

Figure Note:
Trane Part Number 4020 0906
Card identification tag: 50100737
Service part number: BRD0933

BMTW-SVN01F-EN 49
Chapter 4 UCM Communication-Link Wiring

Non-Isolated Comm3 Card


This card is used for Trane VAV I and TRS communication. This is the
same link that was previously provided from the VAV command unit to
the Trane VAV I UCM. VAV command units are not required nor are they
supported for Tracer Summit installations. A maximum of two of these
cards per BCU can be used for VAV applications; one per BCU for Tracer
1000 TRS panels.
Note the color of the card (red), the numbers on the label, and the physi-
cal characteristics of the card as shown in Figure 19.

Figure 19. Non-Isolated Comm3 Communication Card

Figure Note:
Trane Part Number 4020 0907
Card identification tag: 50100738
Service part number: BRD0934

50 BMTW-SVN01F-EN
UCM Communication Cards

Comm4 Card
This card is used for Horizon absorption chiller, IntelliPak, TUC, UCP2,
UPCM, VAV II, VAV III, VAV IV, VAV wireless receiver, and Voyager
communication. A maximum of four of these cards per BCU can be used.
Note the color of the card (green), the numbers on the label, and the phys-
ical characteristics of the card as shown in Figure 20.

Figure 20. Comm4 UCM Communication Card

Figure Note:
Trane Part Number 4020 0979
Card identification tag: 50100757
Service part number: BRD0936

BMTW-SVN01F-EN 51
Chapter 4 UCM Communication-Link Wiring

Comm5 Card
This card is used for the following devices: Tracer AH540 and AH541 con-
trollers, Tracer loop controller, Tracer MP501 controller, Tracer MP503
I/O module, Tracer MP580 and MP581 controllers, Tracer ZN510, ZN511,
ZN517, ZN524, ZN520, ZN521, LCI-I, LCI-V, LCI-R controllers, Tracer
VV550 and VV551 controllers, and other LonTalk® devices. A maximum
of one of these cards per BCU can be used.
Note the color of the card (green), the numbers on the label, and the phys-
ical characteristics of the card as shown in Figure 21.

Figure 21. Comm5 UCM Communication Card

Figure Note:
Trane part number 4020 1124
Card identification tag: 50100857
Service part number: BRD01670

Installing UCM Communication Cards


You can install a card in any of the four slots on the BCU.
To Install a UCM Communication Card:
1. With power turned off at switch S1, align the card with the electronic
components facing toward the bottom of the BCU. Then slowly insert
the card into the slot at a 45-degree angle until the card is seated.
2. Slowly move the card from the 45-degree angle to 0 degrees (horizon-
tal), leaving the card perpendicular to the BCU logic board.
3. Secure the card using the two clips on each side of the slot.
For an illustration of how to install a UCM communication card, see
Figure 22 on page 53.

52 BMTW-SVN01F-EN
UCM Communication Cards

Figure 22. UCM Communication Card Installation

Uninstalling UCM Communication Cards


1. Turn off power at switch S1.
2. Release the two clips on each side of the module.
3. Slowly move the card from the horizontal alignment (0 degrees) to a
45-degree angle.
4. Slowly pull the card from the slot.

BMTW-SVN01F-EN 53
Chapter 4 UCM Communication-Link Wiring

Communication-Link Wire
All Tracer Summit communication-link wiring is low voltage Class 2 and
must be field-supplied and installed in compliance with NEC and local
codes. To prevent electrical noise interference, all communication-link
wiring must also comply with the requirements outlined in this section
for wire selection and individual link configuration. Fiber-optic UCM
communication is also available where extreme distance, electrical noise
immunity, or building-to-building communication is required (See “Fiber-
Optic UCM Communication” on page 64).
Do not run communication-link wiring in the same conduit or wire bundle
with ac-power wires. This could cause the BCU to malfunction due to
electrical noise.
Typical UCM communication-link field wiring is illustrated in Figure 23
on page 55.

54 BMTW-SVN01F-EN
Communication-Link Wire

Figure 23. Typical UCM Communication-Link Field Wiring

Figure Note:
If unshielded wire is used (as recommended for Comm5), there is no shield con-
nection.

UCM Communication-Wire Characteristics


(This section applies only to Comm2, Comm3, Comm4 wire.)
UCM communication-link wiring must be low-capacitance, 18-gauge,
shielded, twisted pair with stranded, tinned-copper conductors. For daisy
chain and branch configurations, limit the wire run length to 5,000 ft
(1,524 m).
Wire capacitance (measured in picofarads/foot [pF/ft] or
picofarads/meter [pF/m]) between conductors must be 23±2 pF/ft

BMTW-SVN01F-EN 55
Chapter 4 UCM Communication-Link Wiring

(72±6 pF/m). Trane wire 400-2028 is recommended. Consult your local


Trane sales office.

Comm5 UCM Communication-Wire Characteristics


The recommended Comm5 communication wiring is 22-gauge, Level 4,
twisted-pair wire, either shielded or unshielded. However, you can also
use low-capacitance, 18-gauge, shielded, twisted-pair with stranded,
tinned-copper conductors (Trane “purple” wire).
Comm5 links should use the daisy chain configuration. The wiring run
length should be limited to 4,500 ft (1,400 m) with no more than eight
zone sensor communication stubs (maximum 50 ft). The links should not
be a star, or trunk and branch configuration.

Recommended Configurations for UCM Communication-Link


Wiring
UCM communication-link wiring must use one of the following
configurations:
• Daisy chain configuration, shown in Figure 24.
• Daisy chain configuration for Comm5, shown in Figure 25 on page 57.
• Branch configuration, shown in Figure 26 on page 58.
(This configuration should not be used with Comm5 communication
links.)

Figure 24. Daisy Chain Configuration for UCM Communication-Link


Wiring, Preferred Configuration for Comm 3, Comm4, or Comm5

Termination resistor

(Comm5 only)

Termination resistor (Comm5 only)

Figure Note:
• Maximum wire length for the entire configuration is 5,000 ft (1,524 m).
• Maximum wire length for Comm5 is 4,500 ft (1,400 m)
(Comm5 wire length limitations can be extended through the use of a link
repeater; see “Comm5 Physical Link Repeater” on page 60).

56 BMTW-SVN01F-EN
Communication-Link Wire

Figure 25. Alternate Daisy Chain Configuration for Comm5


Communication-Link Wiring

Termination resistor

Termination resistor

Repeater

Termination resistor
Termination resistor

Figure Note:
• Maximum wire length for Comm5 is 4,500 ft (1,400 m). on each side of the
repeater.

BMTW-SVN01F-EN 57
Chapter 4 UCM Communication-Link Wiring

Figure 26. Branch Configuration for UCM Communication-Link Wiring

Figure Note:
• Maximum wire length for the entire configuration is limited to 5,000 ft
(1,524 m).
• The maximum number of branches is 10. There are 6 branches shown in the
figure above. (Comm5 wire connections to a sensor are not considered to be
branches.)
• This is not considered a recommended wiring topology for Comm5.
• See “Termination Resistance Placement for Comm5 Links.”

58 BMTW-SVN01F-EN
Communication-Link Wire

Termination Resistor placement for Comm3 and


Comm4 links
Table 8 and Table 9 describe when termination resistors are needed and
where to place them.

Table 8. Termination Resistor Placement for Daisy Chain Configurations

Communication Wire Length Resistance Resistor Placement


Link

2 Any Not required —


0–800 ft (0–244 m) 300 Ω At far end of link
3 800–2,500 ft (244–762 m) Not required —
> 2,500 ft (762 m) 300 Ω At far end of link
4 Any Not required —
5 Any 105 Ω for 22 AWG, Level 4 communication At each end of link
wire. 82 Ω for 18 AWG, Trane “purple”
comm wire

Table 9. Termination Resistor Placement for Branch Configurations

Communication Wire Length Resistance Resistor Placement


Link

2 Any Not required —


3 Any Not required —
4 Any Not required —
5 Not recommended Not recommended Not recommended

Termination Resistance Placement for Comm5 Links


To correctly install a Comm5 link, termination resistors are required.
For correct termination placement, follow the guidelines below:
• Terminate a daisy chain configuration with a resistor at each end of
the wire (105 Ω. for 22 AWG, Level 4 wire and 82 Ω. for18 AWG,
Trane “purple” wire).
• If a repeater is used, each link of the configuration that is created by
the repeater requires termination resistors (see “Alternate Daisy
Chain Resistor Placement” on page 60).
• Trane recommends that only one type of wire should be used for the
Comm5 communication link.
• A set of as-built drawings or a map of the communication wire layout
should be made during installation. Any sketch of the communication
layout should feature the terminating resistor placement (see
Figure 27 and Figure 28 on page 60 for daisy chain configurations).

BMTW-SVN01F-EN 59
Chapter 4 UCM Communication-Link Wiring

Figure 27. Daisy Chain Resistor Placement

BCU

105 Ω
Termination Comm
resistor
Splice Splice
Shield
Shield connection not used
for unshielded wire

105 Ω
Termination
resistor

Figure Note:
A continuous shield is required when shielded wire is used. At each controller,
splice shield wire and tape back to prevent grounding. Connect shield wire to
earth ground at the BCU and repeater. If unshielded communication wire is
used, no shield connections are necessary.

Figure 28. Alternate Daisy Chain Resistor Placement

105 Ω
Termination
Resistor

105 Ω
Termination
Shielded connection not used
Resistor
for unshielded wire
com

Comm5 Physical Link Repeater


The Comm5 link repeater is a device that repeats and regenerates the
signal on a Comm5 link. The Comm5 link goes from the BCU to the
repeater and a second link segment extends from the other side of the
repeater to the rest of the devices. The configurations on either side of the
repeater should be daisy chain. Both link segments require proper
termination.

60 BMTW-SVN01F-EN
Communication-Link Wire

When is the Link Repeater Required?


A link repeater is required when:
• The total wire length is greater than the maximum wire run length of
4,500 ft (1,400 m).
• More than 60 devices are connected to a link. This total does not
include the BCU, the link repeater, and the temporary use of the
Rover service tool on the same link.
• More than eight zone sensor communication stubs (maximum 50 ft)
are required on a Comm5 link (see “Zone Sensor Communication
Stubs” on page 144).

Link Repeater Limitations


The link repeater has several limitations:
• Only one link repeater can be used on a link.
• The use of a repeater doubles the maximum allowable wire length.
For example, when a repeater is used with a daisy chain configura-
tion, the total wire length can be 9,000 ft (2,800 m) (with half the wire
length on either side of the repeater).
• The link repeater is limited to 60 devices on either side of the link.
The total number of devices that can be attached to a repeater is 120.
• The link repeater requires a definite earth ground. The installer
should be aware of this before making any power connections.

Link Repeater Connections


Recommended shield connections are shown in Figure 29 on page 62.
Figure 30 on page 63 is an example of using a repeater to create an
extended daisy chain configuration.
Follow these guidelines when using a repeater:
• Read the Comm5 repeater installation, 3270 3285 information that
comes with the link repeater.
• For information about terminating daisy chain configurations, see
“Termination Resistance Placement for Comm5 Links” on page 59.
• For information about shielded cable connections, see “Recommended
Wiring Practices” on page 64.”
• Shield-drain wires entering the repeater should be connected to a ter-
minal marked with a capacitor symbol. The entering shield-drain
wire must be connected to earth ground at the BCU.
• Shield-drain wires leaving the repeater should be connected to the
repeater terminal marked with an earth ground symbol.

BMTW-SVN01F-EN 61
Chapter 4 UCM Communication-Link Wiring

Figure 29. Comm5 Shield Repeater Connection

62 BMTW-SVN01F-EN
Communication-Link Wire

Figure 30. Comm5 Daisy Chain Repeater Connection

* A continuous shield is required when shielded


wire is used. If unshielded communication wire is
used, no shield connections are necessary. At each
controller, splice shield wire and tape back to
prevent grounding. Connect shield wire to earth
ground at BCU and repeater.

**The value of the termination resistor is


dependent on the wire type: 105 Ω for 22 AWG,
Level 4 wire and 82 Ω for 18 AWG, Trane
“purple” wire.

BMTW-SVN01F-EN 63
Chapter 4 UCM Communication-Link Wiring

Recommended Wiring Practices


The following guidelines should be followed while installing communica-
tion wire:
• Although Comm5 does not require polarity sensitivity, Trane recom-
mends that the installer keep polarity consistent throughout the site.
• Only strip away 2 inches maximum of the outer conductor of shielded
cable.
• Make sure that the 24 Vac power supplies are consistent in how they
are grounded. Avoid sharing 24 Vac between Comm5 UCMs.
• Avoid overtightening cable ties and other forms of cable wraps. This
can damage the wires inside the cable.
• Do not run Comm5 cable alongside or in the same conduit as 24 Vac
power. This includes the conductors running from triac-type inputs.
• In an open plenum, avoid lighting ballasts, especially those using
277 Vac.
• Use a daisy chain configuration. Branch configurations are not rec-
ommended.

Fiber-Optic UCM Communication


Fiber-optic cable is used for applications involving long distances because
there is little degradation of optic signals, and the integrity of the signal
is maintained in the presence of several sources of electrical noise, includ-
ing lightning, EMI/RFI, voltage conductors, and ground loops.
Trane requires duplex, 62.5 µm core glass fiber-optic cable with ST con-
nectors. There are a variety of cables available for different applications
including indoor, outdoor, burial, aerial, and duct.
You can order fiber-optic cables, fiber-optic modems, ST-type crimp con-
nectors, epoxy connectors, and other accessories from Trane through the
Buying Group.
Typically, the fiber-optic UCM communication link is used in applications
where a BCU located in one building communicates not only to the UCMs
within that building, but also to other UCMs located in other buildings.
The fiber-optic cable is used typically as the communication link between
buildings, and it uses EIA-485 data transceivers (D1300) and EIA-485
data repeaters (D2300), which are called fiber-optic modems. These
modems convert the electrical signals from a twisted pair of wires to opti-
cal signals, which are sent over the fiber-optic cable. At the other end, the
optical signals are converted back to electrical signals and sent along the
twisted pair of wires.

IMPORTANT
Trane recommends that only qualified and experienced fiber-optic tech-
nicians prepare the fiber-optic end connectors and cable run lengths.
Improper methods may result in faulty communication due to signal

64 BMTW-SVN01F-EN
Fiber-Optic UCM Communication

degradation (decibel loss). The signal degradation must be less than


14 dB on each fiber.

Note:
Use fiber-optic cable for long distances, interbuilding cabling,
and/or other high electrical noise areas such as petrochemical
installations, electronic rooms, and near hospital NMR or X-ray
rooms.

Fiber-Optic Modems
The EIA-485 data transceiver (D1300) has one fiber-optic port and one
twisted-pair (EIA-485) port. The EIA-485 data repeater (D2300) has two
fiber-optic ports and one twisted-pair (EIA-485) port. Each fiber-optic
port has two connections, one for transmitting information and one for
receiving information.
An illustration of a D2300 fiber-optic modem and the connections to it is
provided in Figure 31. The EIA-485 data transceiver (D1300) looks like
the EIA-485 data repeater (D2300) shown in this figure, but it has only
one fiber-optic port. The mounting and power wiring is the same for both
types of fiber-optic modems.

Figure 31. EIA-485 Data Repeater (D2300) Fiber-Optic Modem

Mounting and Wiring Fiber-Optic Modems


1. Mount the fiber-optic modem on the wall using the four mounting
screw holes on the modem.
2. Connect power to the modem using the ac adapter provided with the
modem. The adapter has two wires; one black with a white stripe, and
one solid black. The white striped wire connects to the 12 Vac/Vdc
connection on the modem, and the solid black wire connects to the
ground (GRD-2) terminal.

BMTW-SVN01F-EN 65
Chapter 4 UCM Communication-Link Wiring

3. Verify that a proper connection is made by plugging the ac adapter


into an electrical outlet and viewing the red power LED on the left
side of the modem. If the red LED does not illuminate, check the
polarity of the connection and verify that the electrical outlet is pow-
ered.
4. Connect the terminated fibers, making sure that the fiber going to
DATA REC on the next modem goes to DATA XTMR on this modem
and vice versa. Keep track of the polarity by recording the color of the
jacket on each fiber and to which connection it goes on each building.

IMPORTANT
Fiber-optic polarity is extremely important! Make sure that the fiber
connections on the fiber-optic modem are reversed for the next
modem, and then reversed again to the next modem, and so on.

5. Connect the UCM communication link and the resistor (provided with
the modem) to the modem as shown in Figure 31 on page 65. Connect
the shield at the BCU end and tape it back at the modem end. Polar-
ity of this connection is important only for Comm4 cards.
Exception: In buildings that do not have a BCU, the shield from the
communication-link wiring must be grounded on the GRD-2 terminal
between the two UCM communication-link wire terminals of the
fiber-optic modem. The shield wire must not touch either of the two
communication wires.
A typical application using twisted-pair communication wire between the
BCU and UCMs within the initial building, then connected to several
other buildings using fiber-optic modems, is shown in Figure 32 on
page 67.

66 BMTW-SVN01F-EN
Fiber-Optic UCM Communication

Figure 32. Typical Fiber-Optic UCM Communication-Link Layout

Optical-Link Loss Budget


Every fiber-optic link has some signal loss (measured in decibels). Many
factors affect decibel loss, including:
• Length of fiber-optic cable
• Transmitter optical output power
• Operating wavelength
• Fiber attenuation
• Fiber bandwidth
• Receiver optical sensitivity
The decibel loss between any two devices is based on how well the termi-
nations or splices are made. A termination or splice can vary from
0.5–2 dB loss. A clean splice results in increased performance.
The fiber-optic modem supported by Trane has a power budget of 14 dB
between 32°F and 140°F (0°C and 60°C). This is the acceptable tempera-
ture range specified for the BCU. The decibel loss for conduit-rated fiber-
optic cable (P/N 400-4002) is 3.75 dB/km (1 km = 3,280 ft). Precut fiber-

BMTW-SVN01F-EN 67
Chapter 4 UCM Communication-Link Wiring

optic cables and professionally spliced and/or terminated cables should


ensure minimal decibel loss.
To calculate the system loss, subtract the cable loss, splice loss, termina-
tor loss, and patch panel loss from the power budget. The example below
shows typical values for the UCM communication link.
power budget – system safety margin = available budget
14 dB – 3 dB = 11 dB (available budget)

available budget: 11 dB
cable loss: – 7.5 dB (1 km at 3.75 dB/km)
allowance for splice loss: – 1 dB (2 at .5 dB)
allowance for end connectors: – 1 dB (2 at .5 dB)
allowance for patch panel: – 1 dB (2 at .5 dB)
excess margin: = 0.5 dB

68 BMTW-SVN01F-EN
Chapter 5

UCM Wiring and Addressing

Unit control modules (UCMs) provide the communication interface neces-


sary for a BCU to monitor and control equipment. In this section, each
UCM is described in terms of the equipment it is used with and the type
of card that provides the communication link.
Addresses for most UCMs are set by using DIP switches or local displays.
In this section, specific tables provide address settings for each of these
UCM types. Appendix A provides an alternative table, along with calcula-
tion instructions, that can be used for all DIP switch settings.
Comm5 UCMs are unique because they do not have a field-configurable
DIP switch address (see “Neuron ID” on page 144).

CenTraVac Unit Control Panel (UCP1)


Interface
CenTraVac unit control panels (UCP1s) allow a Tracer Summit system to
monitor and control the following CenTraVac control chiller models:
CVHE, CVAD, CVHB, and RTHA. One digit of each UCP1’s model num-
ber indicates whether the UCP1 has a bidirectional communication inter-
face and can communicate with Tracer Summit.
For CVHE, CVAD, and CVHB chillers, the UCP1 must have a code num-
ber of 13650396-06 or higher and also have the following model number
specification:
• If the UCP1 model number has 41 digits, digit #38 must be the letter
W or Z.
• If the UCP1 model number has 18 digits, digit #14 must be the
letter B.
For RTHA chillers, the UCP1 must have a code number of 13650396-06 or
higher and digit #13 of the UCP1 model number must be the letter D.

Note:
If the UCP1 control panel is connected to a System Control
Panel (SCP), with or without a Tracer 100 in place, then the
chiller has a bidirectional communication interface (regardless
of the chiller model number). The SCP can be removed and the
chiller can be connected to a Tracer Summit system for moni-
toring and control.

For specific information about the number of UCP1s allowed per BCU
and per communication link, refer to Table 7 on page 46.

BMTW-SVN01F-EN 69
Chapter 5 UCM Wiring and Addressing

Type of Communication Card: Comm2


Refer to “Comm2 Card” on page 48.

Wiring Notes
To establish wiring connections between the UCM and the BCU, Trane
requires that you use the communication-link wiring specified in this
manual. For wire selection specifications, see “UCM Communication-
Wire Characteristics” on page 55.
Use fiber-optic modems for building-to-building communication. If fiber
optics are not used, building-to-building communication wiring requires a
Transtector transient protector at each building. You can purchase Tran-
stector protectors through Trane. Contact your local Trane sales office for
details.
In a daisy chain configuration, use one pair of wires that start at the BCU
and go to all UCMs in a continuous loop. A branch configuration is possi-
ble if you need to tap into a daisy chain. Limit the total aggregate length
of the wiring for each communication link to 5,000 ft (1,524 m).
To connect communication wiring:
1. Attach one end of the communication-link wiring to TB2 on the BCU.
For the location of TB2 refer to Figure 16 on page 47.
2. Attach the other end of the communication-link wiring to the UCP at
the 1TB6 terminal on the 1U3 module of the UCP. Refer to the UCP
literature for details concerning UCP installation and operation.
To connect the shield:
◆ Connect the shield at the BCU (TB2) to provide a drain for RFI/EMI,
and then splice it with other UPC1 UCM shields at the UPC1 UCM
end. Tape the shield at the last UPC1 UCM in the chain to prevent
any connection between the shield and ground (see Figure 33 on
page 71).

Note:
Observe the polarity throughout communication links.

IMPORTANT
UCM ground loops will cause a malfunction.

70 BMTW-SVN01F-EN
Centrifugal/Absorption/Helical Rotary Chiller (UCP2) Interface

Figure 33. Location of Address DIP Switches of UCM Communication


Link on the CenTraVac UPC1

Device Addressing
The UCP address must be set to 01, 02, or 03 in order for it to communi-
cate with the BCU. The address is set with a series of DIP switches (S11)
on the 1U3 module of the UCP (see Figure 33). For UCP DIP switch set-
tings, see Table 10.
Table 10. CenTraVac UCP1 Address Settings

CenTraVac UCP1 DIP Switch Settings


UCM Address
S11-1 S11-2 S11-3 S11-4 S11-5

1 on on on on OFF
2 on on on OFF on
3 on on on OFF OFF

Centrifugal/Absorption/Helical Rotary
Chiller (UCP2) Interface
Description
These Unit Control Panels (UCP2s) allow Tracer Summit to monitor, con-
trol, and configure centrifugal, absorption, and helical rotary chillers. The
chiller must be equipped with a TCI Comm4 communication module to
communicate with a Tracer Summit BCU. For specific information about
the number of UCP2s allowed per BCU and per communication link, refer
to Table 7 on page 46.

BMTW-SVN01F-EN 71
Chapter 5 UCM Wiring and Addressing

Type of Communication Card: Comm4


Refer to “Comm4 Card” on page 51.

Wiring Notes
To establish wiring connections between the UCM and the BCU, Trane
requires that you use the communication-link wiring specified in this
manual. For wire selection specifications, see “UCM Communication-
Wire Characteristics” on page 55.
Use fiber-optic modems for building-to-building communication. If fiber
optics are not used, building-to-building communication wiring requires a
Transtector transient protector at each building. You can purchase Tran-
stector protectors through Trane. Contact your local Trane sales office for
details.
In a daisy chain configuration, use one pair of wires that start at the BCU
and go to all UCMs in a continuous loop. A branch configuration is possi-
ble if you need to tap into a daisy chain. Limit the total aggregate length
of the wiring for each communication link to 5,000 ft (1,524 m).
To connect communication wiring:
1. Attach one end of the communication-link wiring to TB2 on the BCU.
For the location of TB2, refer to Figure 16 on page 47.
2. Attach the other end of the communication-link wiring to the chiller
TCI Comm4 module on the communication-link terminal. For the
location of the communication-link terminations on the chiller TCI
Comm4 module, see Figure 34.

Figure 34. Location of UCM Communication-link Terminations on the


TCI Comm4 Link

72 BMTW-SVN01F-EN
Centrifugal/Absorption/Helical Rotary Chiller (UCP2) Interface

To connect the shield:


◆ Connect the shield at the BCU (TB2) to provide a drain for RFI/EMI,
and then splice it with other UCP2 chiller shields at the UCP2 chiller
end. Tape the shield at the last UCP2 chiller in the chain to prevent
any connection between the shield and ground (see Figure 35).

Note:
Observe the polarity throughout communication links.

IMPORTANT
UCM ground loops will cause a malfunction.

From the UCP2 operator settings menu on the front panel, change the
setpoint source override item to NONE to allow Tracer Summit control. If
this setting is not changed, Tracer Summit is only able to monitor the
UCP2.

Figure 35. ICS Connections Between the BCU and UCP2s on a Comm4
Link

1
Link 1 2
3
4 Device #1 Device #2 Device #3
Link 2 5
6
7 Comm Link Comm Link Comm Link
Link 3 Terminal Block Terminal Block Terminal Block
8
9
10 Cut and tape
Link 4 11 Shield Shield Shield back the
shield wire.
12 Cut and tape Cut and tape Last device on
the shield the shield the Comm4 link
wires together. wires together.

Device Addressing
Each UCM must have a unique address on each link. On the UCP2,
addresses are set from the front panel. Refer to the UCP2 installation,
operation, and maintenance manual for details.

BMTW-SVN01F-EN 73
Chapter 5 UCM Wiring and Addressing

Commercial Self-Contained (CSC) and


IntelliPak CSC Interfaces
Description
Interfaces for the commercial self-contained (CSC) and IntelliPak CSC
provides a communication link between each CSC and the BCU. There
are two generations of CSC UCMs. The first generation is simply referred
to as CSC. The current generation is based on the IntelliPak UCM plat-
form and is referred to as IntelliPak CSC. For specific information about
the number of CSCs allowed per BCU and per communication link, refer
to Table 7 on page 46.

Type of Communication Card: Isolated Comm3


Refer to “Isolated Comm3 Card” on page 49.

Wiring Notes
To establish connections between the UCM and the BCU, Trane requires
that you use the communication-link wiring specified in this manual. For
wire selection specifications, see “UCM Communication-Wire Character-
istics” on page 55.
Use fiber-optic modems for building-to-building communication. If fiber
optics are not used, building-to-building communication wiring requires a
Transtector transient protector at each building. You can purchase Tran-
stector protectors through Trane. Contact your local Trane sales office for
details.
In a daisy chain configuration, use one pair of wires that start at the BCU
and go to all UCMs in a continuous loop. A branch configuration is possi-
ble if you need to tap into a daisy chain. Limit the total aggregate length
of the wiring for each communication link to 5,000 ft (1,524 m).
To connect communication wiring:
1. Attach one end of the communication-link wiring to TB2 on the BCU.
For the location of TB2, refer to Figure 16 on page 47.
2. For the CSC, attach the other end of the communication-link wiring
to the CSC UCM at TB2-1 (TB2-1 is a terminal block located in the
CSC control panel). Refer to the CSC literature for connection points.
For the IntelliPak CSC, attach the other end of the communication-
link wiring to the UCM at the communication link + and – terminals
(see Figure 35 on page 73). For more detailed information on wiring
the Intellipak CSC, refer to the CSC installation literature.

74 BMTW-SVN01F-EN
Commercial Self-Contained (CSC) and IntelliPak CSC Interfaces

To connect the shield:


Connect the shield at the BCU (TB2) to provide a drain for RFI/EMI, and
then splice it with other CSC UCM shields at the CSC UCM end. Tape
the shield at the last CSC UCM in the chain to prevent any connection
between the shield and ground (see Figure 36 on page 76).

Note:
Observe the polarity throughout communication links.

IMPORTANT
UCM ground loops will cause a malfunction.

BMTW-SVN01F-EN 75
Chapter 5 UCM Wiring and Addressing

Figure 36. Location of Address DIP Switches on the CSC UCM

Device Addressing
Each UCM must have a unique address that is set using a DIP switch on
the CSC. The location of the Tracer Summit address DIP switch on the
CSC is shown in Figure 36. For CSC address DIP switch settings, refer to
Table 11 on page 77.

76 BMTW-SVN01F-EN
Commercial Self-Contained (CSC) and IntelliPak CSC Interfaces

For IntelliPak CSCs, addresses are set from the front panel. Refer to the
IntelliPak CSC installation, operation, and maintenance manual for
details.
Table 11. CSC UCM Address Settings

CSC Board A5 DIP Switch Settings


UCM Address
SW6-1 SW6-2 SW6-3 SW6-4 SW6-5

01 OFF OFF OFF OFF on


02 OFF OFF OFF on OFF
03 OFF OFF OFF on on
04 OFF OFF on OFF OFF
05 OFF OFF on OFF on
06 OFF OFF on on OFF
07 OFF OFF on on on
08 OFF on OFF OFF OFF
09 OFF on OFF OFF on
10 OFF on OFF on OFF
11 OFF on OFF on on
12 OFF on on OFF OFF
13 OFF on on OFF on
14 OFF on on on OFF
15 OFF on on on on
16 on OFF OFF OFF OFF
17 on OFF OFF OFF on
18 on OFF OFF on OFF
19 on OFF OFF on on
20 on OFF on OFF OFF
21 on OFF on OFF on
22 on OFF on on OFF
23 on OFF on on on
24 on on OFF OFF OFF
25 on on OFF OFF on
26 on on OFF on OFF
27 on on OFF on on
28 on on on OFF OFF
29 on on on OFF on
30 on on on on OFF
31 on on on on on

BMTW-SVN01F-EN 77
Chapter 5 UCM Wiring and Addressing

Figure 37. IntelliPak CSC DIP Switch Settings and Daughter Board
Alignment on the IntelliPak TCI Module

78 BMTW-SVN01F-EN
Horizon Absorption Chiller Interface

Figure 38. ICS Connections Between the BCU and CSC and IntelliPak
CSC UCMs on an Isolated Comm3 Link

1
Link 1 2
3
4 Device #1 Device #2 Device #3
Link 2 5
6
7 Comm Link Comm Link Comm Link
Link 3 Terminal Block Terminal Block Terminal Block
8
9
10 Cut and tape
Link 4 11 Shield Shield Shield back the
shield wire.
12 Cut and tape Cut and tape Last device on
the shield the shield the Comm4 link
wires together. wires together.

Horizon Absorption Chiller Interface


Description
Tracer Summit can monitor, control, and configure Horizon absorption
chillers. The Horizon interface provides a communication link between
each Horizon absorption chiller and the BCU. For specific information
about the number of Horizons allowed per BCU and per communication
link, refer to Table 7 on page 46.
Absorption chillers manufactured in China and known by the names
Dragon and Navigator also are controlled and monitored using this inter-
face. This section refers only to the Horizon chillers, but applies to the
Dragon and Navigator chillers as well unless specifically stated.
You must configure the menu items on the UCM for proper Tracer Sum-
mit operation according to Table 12.
Table 12. Horizon Absorption Chiller Menu Item Configurations

Menu Option Description

Machine Tracer Option = Enable The Tracer Option is


Configuration installed automatically if
communication with a
BCU occurs.
Machine TCI Option = Enable The TCI Option is installed
Configuration automatically if communi-
cation with a TCI module
occurs.
Operator Setpoint Source Override This allows the chiller to
Settings Item = None receive its setpoints from
the BCU.

BMTW-SVN01F-EN 79
Chapter 5 UCM Wiring and Addressing

The minimum software revision numbers required for compatibility with


Tracer Summit for each of UCM module are shown in Table 13.
Table 13. Horizon and Dragon/Navigator Chiller Minimum Software
Revision Numbers

Horizon Chillers

Module Minimum Software Revision

Burner
Chiller
Circuit
2.0
CLD
Purge
Starter
Stepper
TCI4-Comm4 3.0

Dragon/Navigator Chillers

Module Minimum Software Revision

Burner
CCCLD
Chiller 1.0
Circuit
Stepper
TCI4-Comm4

Type of Communication Card: Comm4


Refer to “Comm4 Card” on page 51.

Note:
The DIP switch block on the TCI4-Comm4 module should have
DIP switches 1 and 3 in the off position, with DIP switch 2 in
the on position.

Wiring Notes
To establish wiring connections between the UCM and the BCU, Trane
requires that you use the communication-link wiring specified in this
manual. For wire selection specifications, see “UCM Communication-
Wire Characteristics” on page 55.
Use fiber-optic modems for building-to-building communication. If fiber
optics are not used, building-to-building communication wiring requires a
Transtector transient protector at each building. You can purchase Tran-

80 BMTW-SVN01F-EN
Horizon Absorption Chiller Interface

stector protectors through Trane. Contact your local Trane sales office for
details.
In a daisy chain configuration, use one pair of wires that start at the BCU
and go to all UCMs in a continuous loop. A branch configuration is possi-
ble if you need to tap into a daisy chain. Limit the total aggregate length
of the wiring for each communication link to 5,000 ft (1,524 m).
To connect communication wiring:
◆ Attach one end of the communication-link wiring to TB2 on the BCU.
For the location of TB2, refer to Figure 16 on page 47. The communi-
cation-link wiring must be connected to the TCI4-Comm4 module on
the communication-link terminal block (J3-A or J3-B)
To connect the shield:
Connect the shield at the BCU (TB2) to provide a drain for RFI/EMI, and
then splice it with other Horizon shields at the Horizon end. Tape the
shield at the last Horizon in the chain to prevent any connection between
the shield and ground (refer to Figure 39). If polarity is reversed and the
BCU is both configured and connected, the green RX light on the TCI4-
Comm4 board will be ON solid.

Note:
Observe the polarity throughout communication links.

IMPORTANT
UCM ground loops will cause a malfunction.

Figure 39. ICS Connections Between the BCU and Horizon Interface on
a Comm4 Link

1
Link 1 2
3
4 Device #1 Device #2 Device #3
Link 2 5
6
7 Comm Link Comm Link Comm Link
Link 3 Terminal Block Terminal Block Terminal Block
8
9
10 Cut and tape
Link 4 11 Shield Shield Shield back the
shield wire.
12 Cut and tape Cut and tape Last device on
the shield the shield the Comm4 link
wires together. wires together.

Device Addressing
Each UCM must have a unique address on each link. On the Horizon
chiller, addresses are set from the front panel. Refer to the Horizon chiller
installation, operation, and maintenance manual for details.

BMTW-SVN01F-EN 81
Chapter 5 UCM Wiring and Addressing

IntelliPak Rooftop Unit Interface


Description
Tracer Summit can monitor, control, and configure IntelliPak rooftop
units. The IntelliPak UCM interface provides a communication link
between the BCU and each IntelliPak. For specific information about the
number of IntelliPaks allowed per BCU and per communication link,
refer to Table 7 on page 46.
IntelliPaks UCMs must have the Trane communication interface (TCI)
module installed in order to communicate with Tracer Summit. The TCI
module must have Version 2 software or higher.
Make sure the DIP switches and the daughter board on the TCI card are
set as shown in Figure 40 on page 84. Refer to the IntelliPak UCM instal-
lation, operation, and maintenance manual for details about confirming
the configuration of the IntelliPak interface.

Type of Communication Card: Comm4


Refer to “Comm4 Card” on page 51.

Wiring Notes
To establish wiring connections between the UCM and the BCU, Trane
requires that you use the communication-link wiring specified in this
manual. For wire selection specifications, see “UCM Communication-
Wire Characteristics” on page 55.
Use fiber-optic modems for building-to-building communication. If fiber
optics are not used, building-to-building communication wiring requires a
Transtector transient protector at each building. You can purchase Tran-
stector protectors through Trane. Contact your local Trane sales office for
details.
In a daisy chain configuration, use one pair of wires that start at the BCU
and go to all UCMs in a continuous loop. A branch configuration is possi-
ble if you need to tap into a daisy chain. Limit the total aggregate length
of the wiring for each communication link to 5,000 ft (1,524 m).
To connect communication wiring:
1. Attach one end of the communication-link wiring to TB2 on the BCU.
For the location of TB2, refer to Figure 16 on page 47.
2. Attach the other end of the communication-link wiring to the Intelli-
Pak UCM at 1TB5-19(+) and 1TB5-20(–) on the control panel. See
Figure 41 on page 85 for connection points on the UCM.

82 BMTW-SVN01F-EN
IntelliPak Rooftop Unit Interface

To connect shield:
Connect the shield at the BCU (TB2) to provide a drain for RFI/EMI, and
then splice it with other IntelliPak shields at the IntelliPak end. Tape the
shield at the last IntelliPak in the chain to prevent any connection
between the shield and ground (see Figure 42 on page 86). Observe the
polarity throughout communication links.

IMPORTANT
UCM ground loops will cause a malfunction.

BMTW-SVN01F-EN 83
Chapter 5 UCM Wiring and Addressing

Figure 40. DIP Switch Settings and Daughter Board Alignment on the
IntelliPak TCI Module

84 BMTW-SVN01F-EN
IntelliPak Rooftop Unit Interface

Figure 41. Human Interface, TCI Module, and Terminal Block Locations
on the IntelliPak UCM

BMTW-SVN01F-EN 85
Chapter 5 UCM Wiring and Addressing

Figure 42. ICS Connections Between the BCU and IntelliPak Rooftop
Unit UCMs on a Comm4 Link

1
Link 1 2
3
4 Device #1 Device #2 Device #3
Link 2 5
6
7 Comm Link Comm Link Comm Link
Link 3 Terminal Block Terminal Block Terminal Block
8
9
10 Cut and tape
Link 4 11 Shield Shield Shield back the
shield wire.
12 Cut and tape Cut and tape Last device on
the shield the shield the Comm4 link
wires together. wires together.

Device Addressing
Each UCM must have a unique address on each link. On the IntelliPak,
addresses are set from the front panel. Refer to the IntelliPak installa-
tion, operation, and maintenance manual for details.

Lighting Control Panel (LCP) Interface


Description
The lighting control panel (LCP) allows Tracer Summit to control build-
ing lighting circuits (typically in accordance with Time of Day schedules)
and monitor physical switch and telephone inputs. The LCP allows coor-
dination of the lighting circuit operation with other building management
functions, like Time of Day scheduling.
The LCP communicates on a Comm3 isolated communication link, via the
LCP supervisor. The LCP supervisor provides a communication interface
between the LCP and the BCU. The LCP supervisor has two serial com-
munication links:
• The first link allows it to communicate with the Tracer Summit BCU
over a twisted, shielded pair of wires.
• The second communication link allows the LCP Supervisor to commu-
nicate with the LCP panels.
The LCP supervisor is a communication-link translator and a pathway
for multiple LCPs. Only one LCP supervisor can exist on the communica-
tion link. For specific information about the number of LCPs allowed per
BCU and per communication link, refer to Table 7 on page 46.

86 BMTW-SVN01F-EN
Lighting Control Panel (LCP) Interface

Type of Communication Card: Isolated Comm3


Refer to “Isolated Comm3 Card” on page 49.

Wiring Notes
To establish connections between the UCM and the BCU, Trane requires
that you use communication-link wire specified in this manual. For wire
selection specifications, see “UCM Communication-Wire Characteristics”
on page 55.
Use fiber-optic modems for building-to-building communication. If fiber
optics are not used, building-to-building communication wiring requires a
Transtector transient protector at each building. You can purchase Tran-
stector protectors through Trane. Contact your local Trane sales office for
details.
To connect communication wiring:
1. Attach one end of the communication-link wiring to TB2 on the BCU.
For the location of TB2, refer to Figure 16 on page 47.
2. Attach the other end of the communication-link wiring to the LCP
supervisor at TB5. For communication-link connection points on the
LCP supervisor, refer to Figure 43 on page 88.

Note:
Observe the polarity throughout communication links.

BMTW-SVN01F-EN 87
Chapter 5 UCM Wiring and Addressing

Figure 43. LCP Supervisor Component Layout

Tracer Summit
24 Vdc Power Communication
from LCP Link
LCP
Reset Switch Address
Communication Link
DIP Switch
(requires termination
(0–81)
resistors)

To connect the shield:


At the LCP supervisor, splice the shield with the shield of the next section
of the communication-link wiring and tape it to prevent any connection
between shield and ground. You can connect the BCU to the LCP supervi-
sor directly or in a daisy chain configuration with other LCPs. Limit the
total aggregate length of the wiring to each communication link to
5,000 ft (1,524 m). For LCP wiring termination points and procedures,
refer to the lighting control panel literature.
Connect the shield at the BCU (TB2) to provide a drain for RFI/EMI, and
then splice it with other LCP shields at the LCP end. Tape the shield at
the last LCP in the chain to prevent any connection between the shield
and ground (see Figure 44 on page 89).

IMPORTANT
UCM ground loops will cause a malfunction.

88 BMTW-SVN01F-EN
Lighting Control Panel (LCP) Interface

Figure 44. DIP Switch Location on LCP Logic Board

Reset Button

Options Select
DIP Switch (for
LCP Address)

Device Addressing
Each LCP supervisor must have a unique address on the LCP communi-
cation link. The LCP supervisor address is set using a DIP switch on the
LCP supervisor. The supervisor is transparent to the BCU. Each LCP
UCM must also have a unique address that is set using a DIP switch on
the LCP.
Assign each LCP a unique address number by setting the DIP switch
labeled Options Select on the logic board. Switch positions are labeled 1
through 8. Valid LCP addresses range from 82 to 126. Press and release
the reset button after setting the address of the LCP.
• The location of the Tracer Summit address DIP switch on the LCP
supervisor is shown in Figure 43 on page 88.
• The location of the address DIP switch on the LCP is shown in
Figure 44.

BMTW-SVN01F-EN 89
Chapter 5 UCM Wiring and Addressing

• For LCP supervisor address DIP switch settings, see Table 14 on


page 90.
• For LCP address DIP switch settings, refer to Table 15 on page 92.
Table 14. LCP Supervisor DIP Switch Settings

UCM DIP-1 DIP-2 DIP-3 DIP-4 DIP-5 DIP-6 DIP-7 DIP-8


Address

0 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF


1 on OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
2 OFF on OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
3 on on OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
4 OFF OFF on OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
5 on OFF on OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
6 OFF on on OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
7 on on on OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
8 OFF OFF OFF on OFF OFF OFF OFF
9 on OFF OFF on OFF OFF OFF OFF
10 OFF on OFF on OFF OFF OFF OFF
11 on on OFF on OFF OFF OFF OFF
12 OFF OFF on on OFF OFF OFF OFF
13 on OFF on on OFF OFF OFF OFF
14 OFF on on on OFF OFF OFF OFF
15 on on on on OFF OFF OFF OFF
16 OFF OFF OFF OFF on OFF OFF OFF
17 on OFF OFF OFF on OFF OFF OFF
18 OFF on OFF OFF on OFF OFF OFF
19 on on OFF OFF on OFF OFF OFF
20 OFF OFF on OFF on OFF OFF OFF
21 on OFF on OFF on OFF OFF OFF
22 OFF on on OFF on OFF OFF OFF
23 on on on OFF on OFF OFF OFF
24 OFF OFF OFF on on OFF OFF OFF
25 on OFF OFF on on OFF OFF OFF
26 OFF on OFF on on OFF OFF OFF
27 on on OFF on on OFF OFF OFF
28 OFF OFF on on on OFF OFF OFF
29 on OFF on on on OFF OFF OFF
30 OFF on on on on OFF OFF OFF
31 on on on on on OFF OFF OFF
32 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF on OFF OFF
33 on OFF OFF OFF OFF on OFF OFF

90 BMTW-SVN01F-EN
Lighting Control Panel (LCP) Interface

Table 14. LCP Supervisor DIP Switch Settings (Continued)

UCM DIP-1 DIP-2 DIP-3 DIP-4 DIP-5 DIP-6 DIP-7 DIP-8


Address

34 OFF on OFF OFF OFF on OFF OFF


35 on on OFF OFF OFF on OFF OFF
36 OFF OFF on OFF OFF on OFF OFF
37 on OFF on OFF OFF on OFF OFF
38 OFF on on OFF OFF on OFF OFF
39 on on on OFF OFF on OFF OFF
40 OFF OFF OFF on OFF on OFF OFF
41 on OFF OFF on OFF on OFF OFF
42 OFF on OFF on OFF on OFF OFF
43 on on OFF on OFF on OFF OFF
44 OFF OFF on on OFF on OFF OFF
45 on OFF on on OFF on OFF OFF
46 OFF on on on OFF on OFF OFF
47 on on on on OFF on OFF OFF
48 OFF OFF OFF OFF on on OFF OFF
49 on OFF OFF OFF on on OFF OFF
50 OFF on OFF OFF on on OFF OFF
51 on on OFF OFF on on OFF OFF
52 OFF OFF on OFF on on OFF OFF
53 on OFF on OFF on on OFF OFF
54 OFF on on OFF on on OFF OFF
55 on on on OFF on on OFF OFF
56 OFF OFF OFF on on on OFF OFF
57 on OFF OFF on on on OFF OFF
58 OFF on OFF on on on OFF OFF
59 on on OFF on on on OFF OFF
60 OFF OFF on on on on OFF OFF
61 on OFF on on on on OFF OFF
62 OFF on on on on on OFF OFF
63 on on on on on on OFF OFF
64 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF on OFF
65 on OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF on OFF
66 OFF on OFF OFF OFF OFF on OFF
67 on on OFF OFF OFF OFF on OFF
68 OFF OFF on OFF OFF OFF on OFF
69 on OFF on OFF OFF OFF on OFF
70 OFF on on OFF OFF OFF on OFF

BMTW-SVN01F-EN 91
Chapter 5 UCM Wiring and Addressing

Table 14. LCP Supervisor DIP Switch Settings (Continued)

UCM DIP-1 DIP-2 DIP-3 DIP-4 DIP-5 DIP-6 DIP-7 DIP-8


Address

71 on on on OFF OFF OFF on OFF


72 OFF OFF OFF on OFF OFF on OFF
73 on OFF OFF on OFF OFF on OFF
74 OFF on OFF on OFF OFF on OFF
75 on on OFF on OFF OFF on OFF
76 OFF OFF on on OFF OFF on OFF
77 on OFF on on OFF OFF on OFF
78 OFF on on on OFF OFF on OFF
79 on on on on OFF OFF on OFF
80 OFF OFF OFF OFF on OFF on OFF
81 on OFF OFF OFF on OFF on OFF

Table 15. LCP Address (Options Select) DIP Switch Settings

UCM DIP-1 DIP-2 DIP-3 DIP-4 DIP-5 DIP-6 DIP-7 DIP-8


Address

82 OFF on OFF OFF on OFF on OFF


83 on on OFF OFF on OFF on OFF
84 OFF OFF on OFF on OFF on OFF
85 on OFF on OFF on OFF on OFF
86 OFF on on OFF on OFF on OFF
87 on on on OFF on OFF on OFF
88 OFF OFF OFF on on OFF on OFF
89 on OFF OFF on on OFF on OFF
90 OFF on OFF on on OFF on OFF
91 on on OFF on on OFF on OFF
92 OFF OFF on on on OFF on OFF
93 on OFF on on on OFF on OFF
94 OFF on on on on OFF on OFF
95 on on on on on OFF on OFF
96 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF on on OFF
97 on OFF OFF OFF OFF on on OFF
98 OFF on OFF OFF OFF on on OFF
99 on on OFF OFF OFF on on OFF
100 OFF OFF on OFF OFF on on OFF
101 on OFF on OFF OFF on on OFF
102 OFF on on OFF OFF on on OFF
103 on on on OFF OFF on on OFF

92 BMTW-SVN01F-EN
Programmable Control Module (PCM) Interface

Table 15. LCP Address (Options Select) DIP Switch Settings (Continued)

UCM DIP-1 DIP-2 DIP-3 DIP-4 DIP-5 DIP-6 DIP-7 DIP-8


Address

104 OFF OFF OFF on OFF on on OFF


105 on OFF OFF on OFF on on OFF
106 OFF on OFF on OFF on on OFF
107 on on OFF on OFF on on OFF
108 OFF OFF on on OFF on on OFF
109 on OFF on on OFF on on OFF
110 OFF on on on OFF on on OFF
111 on on on on OFF on on OFF
112 OFF OFF OFF OFF on on on OFF
113 on OFF OFF OFF on on on OFF
114 OFF on OFF OFF on on on OFF
115 on on OFF OFF on on on OFF
116 OFF OFF on OFF on on on OFF
117 on OFF on OFF on on on OFF
118 OFF on on OFF on on on OFF
119 on on on OFF on on on OFF
120 OFF OFF OFF on on on on OFF
121 on OFF OFF on on on on OFF
122 OFF on OFF on on on on OFF
123 on on OFF on on on on OFF
124 OFF OFF on on on on on OFF
125 on OFF on on on on on OFF
126 OFF on on on on on on OFF

Programmable Control Module (PCM)


Interface
Description
Programmable control modules (PCMs) allow Tracer Summit to monitor
and control HVAC equipment such as air handlers, chillers, pumps, and
generic loads. You can also use PCMs to add generic analog and binary
inputs and outputs to Tracer Summit.
You can connect PCMs to any isolated Comm3 UCM communication link
on TB2. The link provides a serial communication interface between the
BCU and each PCM in the system. For specific information about the
number of PCMs allowed per BCU and per communication link, refer to
Table 7 on page 46.

BMTW-SVN01F-EN 93
Chapter 5 UCM Wiring and Addressing

Type of Communication Card: Isolated Comm3


Refer to “Isolated Comm3 Card” on page 49.

Wiring Notes
To establish wiring connections between the UCM and the BCU, Trane
requires that you use the communication-link wire specified in this man-
ual. For wire selection specifications, see “UCM Communication-Wire
Characteristics” on page 55.
Use fiber-optic modems for building-to-building communication. If fiber
optics are not used, building-to-building communication wiring requires a
Transtector transient protector at each building. You can purchase Tran-
stector protectors through Trane. Contact your local Trane sales office for
details.
In a daisy chain configuration, use one pair of wires that start at the BCU
and go to all UCMs in a continuous loop. A branch configuration is possi-
ble if you need to tap into a daisy chain. Limit the total aggregate length
of the wiring for each communication link to 5,000 ft (1,524 m).
To connect the communication wiring:
1. Attach one end of the communication-link wiring to TB2 on the BCU.
For the location of TB2, refer to Figure 16 on page 47.
2. Attach the other end of the communication-link wiring to the PCM at
the TB2 terminal. For connection points, refer to the PCM literature.
To connect the shield:
Connect the shield at the BCU (TB2) to provide a drain for RFI/EMI, and
then splice it with other PCM UCM shields at the PCM UCM end. Tape
the shield at the last PCM UCM in the chain to prevent any connection
between the shield and ground (see Figure 45 on page 95).

Note:
Observe the polarity throughout communication links.

IMPORTANT
UCM ground loops will cause a malfunction.

94 BMTW-SVN01F-EN
Programmable Control Module (PCM) Interface

Figure 45. Location of Address DIP Switches and UCM Communication


Link on the PCM

Figure Note:
PCM board is much wider than shown here.

Device Addressing
Each UCM must have a unique address on each link. On the PCM, the
address is set with the S2 address DIP switches (see Figure 45). For PCM
DIP switch settings, refer to Table 16 on page 96.

BMTW-SVN01F-EN 95
Chapter 5 UCM Wiring and Addressing

Table 16. PCM Address Settings

PCM DIP Switch Settings


UCM
Address
S2-1 S2-2 S2-3 S2-4 S2-5 S2-6 S2-7 S2-8

1 OFF on on on on on OFF OFF


2 on OFF on on on on OFF OFF
3 OFF OFF on on on on OFF OFF
4 on on OFF on on on OFF OFF
5 OFF on OFF on on on OFF OFF
6 on OFF OFF on on on OFF OFF
7 OFF OFF OFF on on on OFF OFF
8 on on on OFF on on OFF OFF
9 OFF on on OFF on on OFF OFF
10 on OFF on OFF on on OFF OFF
11 OFF OFF on OFF on on OFF OFF
12 on on OFF OFF on on OFF OFF
13 OFF on OFF OFF on on OFF OFF
14 on OFF OFF OFF on on OFF OFF
15 OFF OFF OFF OFF on on OFF OFF
16 on on on on OFF on OFF OFF
17 OFF on on on OFF on OFF OFF
18 on OFF on on OFF on OFF OFF
19 OFF OFF on on OFF on OFF OFF
20 on on OFF on OFF on OFF OFF
21 OFF on OFF on OFF on OFF OFF
22 on OFF OFF on OFF on OFF OFF
23 OFF OFF OFF on OFF on OFF OFF
24 on on on OFF OFF on OFF OFF
25 OFF on on OFF OFF on OFF OFF
26 on OFF on OFF OFF on OFF OFF
27 OFF OFF on OFF OFF on OFF OFF
28 on on OFF OFF OFF on OFF OFF
29 OFF on OFF OFF OFF on OFF OFF
30 on OFF OFF OFF OFF on OFF OFF
Note:
• DIP switches 7 and 8 must always be off.
• Cycle power off/on after changing settings.

96 BMTW-SVN01F-EN
RTA-RTW Chiller Interface

RTA-RTW Chiller Interface


Description
RTA-RTW UCMs allow Tracer Summit to monitor, control, and configure
air-cooled chillers and water-cooled chillers. The RTA-RTW interface pro-
vides a communication link between the BCU and each RTA-RTW chiller.
For specific information about the number of RTA-RTWs allowed per
BCU and per communication link, refer to Table 7 on page 46.

Type of Communication Card: Isolated Comm3


Refer to “Isolated Comm3 Card” on page 49.

Wiring Notes
To establish wiring connections between the UCM and the BCU, Trane
requires that you use the communication-link wiring specified in this
manual. For wire selection specifications, see “UCM Communication-
Wire Characteristics” on page 55.
Use fiber-optic modems for building-to-building communication. If fiber
optics are not used, building-to-building communication wiring requires a
Transtector transient protector at each building. You can purchase Tran-
stector protectors through Trane. Contact your local Trane sales office for
details.
In a daisy chain configuration, use one pair of wires that start at the BCU
and go to all UCMs in a continuous loop. A branch configuration is possi-
ble if you need to tap into a daisy chain. Limit the total aggregate length
of the wiring for each communication link to 5,000 ft (1,524 m).
To connect communication wiring:
1. Attach one end of the communication-link wiring to TB2 on the BCU.
For the location of TB2, refer to Figure 16 on page 47.
2. Attach the other end of the communication-link wiring to the RTA-
RTW UCM at TB2-1 and TB2-2 on the CSR board. For connection
points on the UCM, see Figure 46 on page 98.

BMTW-SVN01F-EN 97
Chapter 5 UCM Wiring and Addressing

To connect shield:
1. Connect the shield at the BCU (TB2) to provide a drain for RFI/EMI,
and then splice it with other RTA/RTW shields at the RTA/RTW end.
2. Tape the shield at the last RTA/RTW in the chain to prevent any con-
nection between the shield and ground (see Figure 46).

Note:
Observe the polarity throughout communication links.

IMPORTANT
UCM ground loops will cause a malfunction.

Figure 46. Location of UCM Communication-link Terminations on the


CSR Board on the RTA-RTW UCM

Device Addressing
Each UCM must have a unique address on each link. On the RTA/RTW,
addresses are set from the front panel. Refer to the RTA/RTW installa-
tion, operation, and maintenance manual for details.

98 BMTW-SVN01F-EN
Scroll Chillers: U.S.-built CGA/CGW and IntelliPak (CGAF) Interfaces

Scroll Chillers: U.S.-built CGA/CGW


and IntelliPak (CGAF) Interfaces
Description
Interfaces for the scroll chillers CGA/CGW and IntelliPak (CGAF) pro-
vide a communication link between each scroll chiller and the BCU. For
specific information about the number of scroll chillers allowed per BCU
and per communication link, refer to Table 7 on page 46.
For information on scroll chillers manufactured in Europe, see “Trane
Europe Chiller Interface” on page 115.

Type of Communication Card: Isolated Comm3


Refer to “Isolated Comm3 Card” on page 49.

Wiring Notes
To establish wiring connections between the UCM and the BCU, Trane
requires that you use the communication-link wire specified in this man-
ual. For wire selection specifications, see “UCM Communication-Wire
Characteristics” on page 55.
Use fiber-optic modems for building-to-building communication. If fiber
optics are not used, building-to-building communication wiring requires a
Transtector transient protector at each building. You can purchase Tran-
stector protectors through Trane. Contact your local Trane sales office for
details.
In a daisy chain configuration, use one pair of wires that start at the BCU
and go to all UCMs in a continuous loop. A branch configuration is possi-
ble if you need to tap into a daisy chain. Limit the total aggregate length
of the wiring for each communication link to 5,000 ft (1,524 m).
To connect communication wiring:
1. Attach one end of the communication-link wiring to TB2 on the BCU.
For the location of TB2, refer to Figure 16 on page 47.
2. For the CGA/CGW, attach the other end of the communication-link
wiring to the UCM at TB2-1 and TB2-2. For the location of the TB2
terminal block on the CGA/CGW, refer to Figure 47 on page 100. For
the CGAF, attach the other end of the communication-link wiring to
the UCM at the comm link + and – terminals. For the location of the
comm link, refer to Figure 48 on page 101. For more detailed informa-
tion on wiring the CGAF, refer to CGAF-IOM-1.
To connect shield:
Connect the shield at the BCU (TB2) to provide a drain for RFI/EMI, and
then splice it with other UCM shields at the UCM end. Tape the shield at

BMTW-SVN01F-EN 99
Chapter 5 UCM Wiring and Addressing

the last UCM in the chain to prevent any connection between the shield
and ground (see Figure 49 on page 102).

Note:
Observe the polarity throughout communication links.

IMPORTANT
UCM ground loops will cause a malfunction.

Figure 47. Location of the Address DIP Switches on the CGA/CGW


UCM

100 BMTW-SVN01F-EN
Scroll Chillers: U.S.-built CGA/CGW and IntelliPak (CGAF) Interfaces

Figure 48. IntelliPak (CGAF) DIP Switch Settings and Daughter Board
Alignment on the IntelliPak TCI Module

BMTW-SVN01F-EN 101
Chapter 5 UCM Wiring and Addressing

Figure 49. ICS Connections Between the BCU and U.S.-built Scroll
Chiller (CGA/CGW and CGAF) UCMs on an Isolated Comm3 Link

1
Link 1 2
3
4 Device #1 Device #2 Device #3
Link 2 5
6
7 Comm Link Comm Link Comm Link
Link 3 Terminal Block Terminal Block Terminal Block
8
9
10 Cut and tape
Link 4 11 Shield Shield Shield back the
shield wire.
12 Cut and tape Cut and tape Last device on
the shield the shield the Comm4 link
wires together. wires together.

Device Addressing
Each UCM must have a unique address that is set using a DIP switch on
the scroll chiller. For CGA/CGWs, the location of the address DIP
switches is shown in Figure 47 on page 100. For address DIP switch set-
tings for CGA/CGWs, refer to Table 17 on page 103.
For CGAFs, addresses are set from the front panel. Refer to the CGAF
installation, operation, and maintenance manual for details.

102 BMTW-SVN01F-EN
Scroll Chillers: U.S.-built CGA/CGW and IntelliPak (CGAF) Interfaces

Table 17. CGA/CGW Address Settings

Scroll Chiller DIP Switch Settings


UCM Address
SW6-1 SW6-2 SW6-3 SW6-4 SW6-5

33 OFF OFF OFF OFF on


34 OFF OFF OFF on OFF
35 OFF OFF OFF on on
36 OFF OFF on OFF OFF
37 OFF OFF on OFF on
38 OFF OFF on on OFF
39 OFF OFF on on on
40 OFF on OFF OFF OFF
41 OFF on OFF OFF on
42 OFF on OFF on OFF
43 OFF on OFF on on
44 OFF on on OFF OFF
45 OFF on on OFF on
46 OFF on on on OFF
47 OFF on on on on
48 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
49 on OFF OFF OFF on
50 on OFF OFF on OFF
51 on OFF OFF on on
52 on OFF on OFF OFF
53 on OFF on OFF on
54 on OFF on on OFF
55 on OFF on on on
56 on on OFF OFF OFF
57 on on OFF OFF on
58 on on OFF on OFF
59 on on OFF on on
60 on on on OFF OFF
61 on on on OFF on
62 on on on on OFF
63 on on on on on

BMTW-SVN01F-EN 103
Chapter 5 UCM Wiring and Addressing

Terminal Unit Controller (TUC)


Interface
Description
Terminal unit controllers (TUCs) allow Tracer Summit to monitor and
control terminal units such as fan coils, water-source heat pumps, unit
ventilators, and blower coils.
You can connect TUCs to any Comm4 UCM communication link in the
BCU on TB2. The link provides a serial communication interface between
the BCU and each TUC in the system. For specific information about the
number of TUCs allowed per BCU and per communication link, refer to
Table 7 on page 46. Make certain that the polarity is observed throughout
the link. For polarity information, refer to Figure 16 on page 47.

Type of Communication Card: Comm4


Refer to “Comm4 Card” on page 51.

Wiring Notes
To establish wiring connections between the UCM and the BCU, Trane
requires that you use the communications-link wiring specified in this
manual. For wire selection specifications, see “UCM Communication-
Wire Characteristics” on page 55.
Use fiber-optic modems for building-to-building communication. If fiber
optics are not used, building-to-building communication wiring requires a
Transtector transient protector at each building. You can purchase Tran-
stector protectors through Trane. Contact your local Trane sales office for
details.
In a daisy chain configuration, use one pair of wires that start at the BCU
and go to all UCMs in a continuous loop. A branch configuration is possi-
ble if you need to tap into a daisy chain. Limit the total aggregate length
of the wiring for each communication link to 5,000 ft (1,524 m).
To connect communication wiring:
1. Attach one end of the communication-link wiring to TB2 on the BCU.
For the location of TB2, refer to Figure 16 on page 47.
2. Attach the other end of the communication-link wiring to the TUC at
the ICS terminal. Refer to the TUC installation literature
(EMTX-IOP-1) for connection points.

104 BMTW-SVN01F-EN
Terminal Unit Controller (TUC) Interface

To connect shield:
Connect the shield at the BCU (TB2) to provide a drain for RFI/EMI, and
then splice it with other TUC shields at the TUC end. Tape the shield at
the last TUC in the chain to prevent any connection between the shield
and ground (see Figure 50).

Note:
Observe the polarity throughout communication links.

IMPORTANT
UCM ground loops will cause a malfunction.

Figure 50. ICS Connections Between the BCU and TUCs on a Comm4
Link

1
Link 1 2
3
4 Device #1 Device #2 Device #3
Link 2 5
6
7 Comm Link Comm Link Comm Link
Link 3 Terminal Block Terminal Block Terminal Block
8
9
10 Cut and tape
Link 4 11 Shield Shield Shield back the
shield wire.
12 Cut and tape Cut and tape Last device on
the shield the shield the Comm4 link
wires together. wires together.

Device Addressing
Each UCM must have a unique address on each link. On the TUC, the
address is set with the SW1 address DIP switches, followed by a momen-
tary short between J11 and J12 (see Figure 51 on page 106). For TUC
DIP switch settings, refer to Table 18 on page 107.

BMTW-SVN01F-EN 105
Chapter 5 UCM Wiring and Addressing

Figure 51. Location of the DIP Switch Block and Test Input on the TUC

106 BMTW-SVN01F-EN
Terminal Unit Controller (TUC) Interface

Table 18. TUC Address Settings

TUC DIP Switch Settings


UCM
Address
DIP 1 DIP 2 DIP 3 DIP 4 DIP 5 DIP 6 DIP 7 DIP 8

33 OFF OFF on OFF OFF OFF OFF on


34 OFF OFF on OFF OFF OFF on OFF
35 OFF OFF on OFF OFF OFF on on
36 OFF OFF on OFF OFF on OFF OFF
37 OFF OFF on OFF OFF on OFF on
38 OFF OFF on OFF OFF on on OFF
39 OFF OFF on OFF OFF on on on
40 OFF OFF on OFF on OFF OFF OFF
41 OFF OFF on OFF on OFF OFF on
42 OFF OFF on OFF on OFF on OFF
43 OFF OFF on OFF on OFF on on
44 OFF OFF on OFF on on OFF OFF
45 OFF OFF on OFF on on OFF on
46 OFF OFF on OFF on on on OFF
47 OFF OFF on OFF on on on on
48 OFF OFF on on OFF OFF OFF OFF
49 OFF OFF on on OFF OFF OFF on
50 OFF OFF on on OFF OFF on OFF
51 OFF OFF on on OFF OFF on on
52 OFF OFF on on OFF on OFF OFF
53 OFF OFF on on OFF on OFF on
54 OFF OFF on on OFF on on OFF
55 OFF OFF on on OFF on on on
56 OFF OFF on on on OFF OFF OFF
57 OFF OFF on on on OFF OFF on
58 OFF OFF on on on OFF on OFF
59 OFF OFF on on on OFF on on
60 OFF OFF on on on on OFF OFF
61 OFF OFF on on on on OFF on
62 OFF OFF on on on on on OFF
63 OFF OFF on on on on on on
64 OFF on OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
65 OFF on OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF on
66 OFF on OFF OFF OFF OFF on OFF
67 OFF on OFF OFF OFF OFF on on
68 OFF on OFF OFF OFF on OFF OFF

BMTW-SVN01F-EN 107
Chapter 5 UCM Wiring and Addressing

Table 18. TUC Address Settings (Continued)

TUC DIP Switch Settings


UCM
Address
DIP 1 DIP 2 DIP 3 DIP 4 DIP 5 DIP 6 DIP 7 DIP 8

69 OFF on OFF OFF OFF on OFF on


70 OFF on OFF OFF OFF on on OFF
71 OFF on OFF OFF OFF on on on
72 OFF on OFF OFF on OFF OFF OFF
73 OFF on OFF OFF on OFF OFF on
74 OFF on OFF OFF on OFF on OFF
75 OFF on OFF OFF on OFF on on
76 OFF on OFF OFF on on OFF OFF
77 OFF on OFF OFF on on OFF on
78 OFF on OFF OFF on on on OFF
79 OFF on OFF OFF on on on on
80 OFF on OFF on OFF OFF OFF OFF
81 OFF on OFF on OFF OFF OFF on
82 OFF on OFF on OFF OFF on OFF
83 OFF on OFF on OFF OFF on on
84 OFF on OFF on OFF on OFF OFF
85 OFF on OFF on OFF on OFF on
86 OFF on OFF on OFF on on OFF
87 OFF on OFF on OFF on on on
88 OFF on OFF on on OFF OFF OFF
89 OFF on OFF on on OFF OFF on
90 OFF on OFF on on OFF on OFF
91 OFF on OFF on on OFF on on
92 OFF on OFF on on on OFF OFF
93 OFF on OFF on on on OFF on
94 OFF on OFF on on on on OFF
95 OFF on OFF on on on on on
96 OFF on on OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
Note:
Momentarily short test inputs J11 and J12 after changing switch settings.

108 BMTW-SVN01F-EN
Thermostat Control Module (TCM) Interface

Thermostat Control Module (TCM)


Interface
Description
Thermostat Control Modules (TCMs) can provide generic inputs and out-
puts that are controlled directly by Tracer Summit. TCMs can also func-
tion as thermostats for air conditioning units and heat pumps. The TCM
interface provides a communication link between the BCU and each
TCM. For specific information about the number of TCMs allowed per
BCU and per communication link, refer to Table 7 on page 46.

Type of Communication Card: Isolated Comm3


Refer to “Isolated Comm3 Card” on page 49.

Wiring Notes
To establish wiring connections between the UCM and the BCU, Trane
requires that you use the communications-link wiring specified in this
manual. For wire selection specifications, see “UCM Communication-
Wire Characteristics” on page 55.
Use fiber-optic modems for building-to-building communication. If fiber
optics are not used, building-to-building communication wiring requires a
Transtector transient protector at each building. You can purchase Tran-
stector protectors through Trane. Contact your local Trane sales office for
details.
In a daisy chain configuration, use one pair of wires that start at the BCU
and go to all UCMs in a continuous loop. A branch configuration is possi-
ble if you need to tap into a daisy chain. Limit the total aggregate length
of the wiring for each communication link to 5,000 ft (1,524 m).
To connect communication wiring:
1. Attach one end of the communication-link wiring to TB2 on the BCU.
For the location of TB2, refer to Figure 16 on page 47.
2. Attach the other end of the communication-link wiring to the TCM at
TB2-1 and TB2-2. Refer to the TCM installation, operation, and
maintenance literature for connection points.
To connect shield:
1. Connect the shield at the BCU (TB2) to provide a drain for RFI/EMI,
and then splice it with other TCM UCM shields at the TCM UCM
end.
2. Tape the shield at the last TCM UCM in the chain to prevent any con-
nection between the shield and ground (see Figure 52 on page 110).

Note:
Observe the polarity throughout communication links.

BMTW-SVN01F-EN 109
Chapter 5 UCM Wiring and Addressing

IMPORTANT
UCM ground loops will cause a malfunction.

Figure 52. Location of Address DIP Switch and UCM Communication


Link on the TCM

Device Addressing
Each UCM must have a unique address that is set using a DIP switch on
the TCM.
• For the location of the address DIP switch on the TCM, refer to
Figure 52.
• For TCM address DIP switch settings, refer to Table 19 on page 111.
• For the TCM configuration DIP switch settings for S1-7 and S1-8,
refer to Table 20 on page 111.

110 BMTW-SVN01F-EN
Thermostat Control Module (TCM) Interface

Table 19. TCM Address Settings

TCM DIP Switch Settings

UCM Address S1-1 S1-2 S1-3 S1-4 S1-5 S1-6

1 OFF on on on on on
2 on OFF on on on on
3 OFF OFF on on on on
4 on on OFF on on on
5 OFF on OFF on on on
6 on OFF OFF on on on
7 OFF OFF OFF on on on
8 on on on OFF on on
9 OFF on on OFF on on
10 on OFF on OFF on on
11 OFF OFF on OFF on on
12 on on OFF OFF on on
13 OFF on OFF OFF on on
14 on OFF OFF OFF on on
15 OFF OFF OFF OFF on on
16 on on on on OFF on
17 OFF on on on OFF on
18 on OFF on on OFF on
19 OFF OFF on on OFF on

Table 20. TCM Configuration DIP Switch Settings

TCM DIP Switch Settings

Program Option S1-7 S1-8

Slave OFF OFF


Air conditioning thermostat OFF on
Heat pump thermostat on OFF
Test mode on on

BMTW-SVN01F-EN 111
Chapter 5 UCM Wiring and Addressing

Tracer Remote Station (TRS) Interface


Description
The Tracer remote station (TRS) allows Tracer Summit to monitor and
control inputs and outputs from an existing Tracer 1000 installation. The
TRS interface provides a communication link between each TRS and the
BCU. For specific information about the number of TRSs allowed per
BCU and per communication link, refer to Table 7 on page 46.

Type of Communication Card: Non-Isolated Comm3


Refer to “Non-Isolated Comm3 Card” on page 50.

Note:
TRSs cannot coexist with other types of UCMs on the same
communication link. The non-isolated Comm3 link must be
dedicated solely to the TRS interface.

Wiring Notes
To establish wiring connections between the UCM and the BCU, Trane
requires that you use the communication-link wiring specified in this
manual. For wire selection specifications, see “UCM Communication-
Wire Characteristics” on page 55.
Use fiber-optic modems for building-to-building communication. If fiber
optics are not used, building-to-building communication wiring requires a
Transtector transient protector at each building. You can purchase Tran-
stector protectors through Trane. Contact your local Trane sales office for
details.
To connect communication wiring:
1. Attach one end of the communication-link wiring to TB2-6 and TB2-7
on the BCU. Make certain that the shield is terminated in the proper
location. For the location of TB2, refer to Figure 16 on page 47.
2. Attach the other end of the communication-link wiring to the TRS at
the Channel A Terminator (A+, A-) on TB3. For connection points on
the TRS, see Figure 53 on page 113. Limit the total aggregate length
of the wiring to each communication link to 5,000 ft (1,524 m).
To connect shield:
1. Connect the shield at the BCU (TB2) to provide a drain for RFI/EMI,
and then splice it with other TRS shields at the TRS end.
2. Tape the shield at the last TRS in the chain to prevent any connection
between the shield and ground (see Figure 53 on page 113).

Note:
Observe the polarity throughout communication links.

112 BMTW-SVN01F-EN
Tracer Remote Station (TRS) Interface

IMPORTANT
UCM ground loops will cause a malfunction.

Figure 53. Location of UCM Communication Link Terminations on TB3


of the Channel Terminator in the TRS

BMTW-SVN01F-EN 113
Chapter 5 UCM Wiring and Addressing

Device Addressing
Each UCM must have a unique address on each link. TRSs can have an
address from 0 through 15. Set the address of each TRS on the communi-
cation card in Slot 9 of the TRS card cage. The TRS address is set with
the S1 address DIP switches on the communication card. The DIP switch
settings for the valid addresses are shown in Table 21.

Note:
Since the TRS interface feature of Tracer Summit is used pri-
marily in retrofit or migration applications, the TRS communi-
cation addressing should already be configured. However, due
to BCU capacity and loading, it may be necessary to split an
existing TRS link containing up to 16 TRS panels into multiple
links with fewer UCMs. In this case, it may be prudent to leave
the TRS communication-link addresses as configured and set
up the BCU to communicate at those addresses.

Table 21. TRS Address Settings

TRS Switch S1 DIP Switch Settings


UCM Address
S1-1 S1-2 S1-3 S1-4

0 CLOSED CLOSED CLOSED CLOSED


1 open CLOSED CLOSED CLOSED
2 CLOSED open CLOSED CLOSED
3 open open CLOSED CLOSED
4 CLOSED CLOSED open CLOSED
5 open CLOSED open CLOSED
6 CLOSED open open CLOSED
7 open open open CLOSED
8 CLOSED CLOSED CLOSED open
9 open CLOSED CLOSED open
10 CLOSED open CLOSED open
11 open open CLOSED open
12 CLOSED CLOSED open open
13 open CLOSED open open
14 CLOSED open open open
15 open open open open
Note:
Actual TRS DIP switch labels are OPEN and CLOSED. On this address table, open = off
and closed = on.

114 BMTW-SVN01F-EN
Trane Europe Chiller Interface

Trane Europe Chiller Interface


Description
The Trane Europe chiller interface allows Tracer Summit to monitor and
control scroll chillers equipped with scroll manager module (SMM) con-
trollers. These chillers are manufactured in Mirecourt, France. These
include models designated as follows:
• CGAH
• CGWH
• RAUH
• CCUH
• CGCH
• CXAH
• RACH
For information on non-SMM controlled Trane Europe chiller models,
contact Trane Europe. For information about the number of Trane
Europe chillers allowed per BCU and per communication link, refer to
Table 7 on page 46.

Type of Communication Card: Isolated Comm3


Refer to “Isolated Comm3 Card” on page 49.

Wiring Notes
To establish wiring connections between the UCM and the BCU, Trane
requires that you use the communications-link wiring specified in this
manual. For wire selection specifications, see “UCM Communication-
Wire Characteristics” on page 55.
Use fiber-optic modems for building-to-building communication. If fiber
optics are not used, building-to-building communication wiring requires a
Transtector transient protector at each building. You can purchase Tran-
stector protectors through Trane. Contact your local Trane sales office for
details.
In a daisy chain configuration, use one pair of wires that start at the BCU
and go to all UCMs in a continuous loop. A branch configuration is possi-
ble if you need to tap into a daisy chain. Limit the total aggregate length
of the wiring for each communication link to 5,000 ft (1,524 m).
To connect communication wiring:
1. Attach one end of the communication-link wiring to TB2 on the BCU.
For the location of TB2, refer to Figure 16 on page 47.
2. Attach the other end of the communication-link wiring to the Trane
Europe chiller. Refer to the Trane Europe chiller literature for con-
nection points.

BMTW-SVN01F-EN 115
Chapter 5 UCM Wiring and Addressing

To connect shield:
1. Connect the shield at the BCU (TB2) to provide a drain for RFI/EMI,
and then splice it with other SMM/UCM shields at the SMM/UCM
end.
2. Tape the shield at the last SMM/UCM in the chain to prevent any
connection between the shield and ground (refer to the Trane Europe
chiller installation, operation, and maintenance manual for details).

Note:
Observe the polarity throughout communication links.

IMPORTANT
UCM ground loops will cause a malfunction.

Figure 54. ICS Connections Between the BCU and Trane Europe Chiller
Interface
-
+ 1
Link 1 2
S 3
-
+ 4 SMM #1 SMM #2 SMM #3
Link 2 5
S 6 Serial Serial Serial
- 7
+ Communication Communication Communication
Link 3 8 Link - Link - Link -
S 9 + + +
-
+ 10 Cut and tape
Link 4 11 Shield Shield Shield back the
S 12 shield wire.
Cut and tape Cut and tape Last device on
the shield the shield the Comm4 link
wires together. wires together.

Device Addressing
Each UCM must have a unique address on each link. On the Trane
Europe chiller, addresses are set from the front panel. Refer to the Trane
Europe chiller installation, operation, and maintenance manual for
details.

116 BMTW-SVN01F-EN
Universal Programmable Control Module (UPCM) Interface

Universal Programmable Control


Module (UPCM) Interface
Description
Universal programmable control modules (UPCMs) allow a Tracer Sum-
mit system to monitor and control HVAC equipment such as air handlers,
chillers, pumps, and generic loads. You can also use UPCMs to add
generic analog and binary inputs and outputs to Tracer Summit.
You can connect UPCMs to any Comm4 UCM communication link in the
BCU on TB2. The link provides a serial communication interface between
the BCU and each UPCM. For specific information about the number of
UPCMs allowed per BCU and per communication link, refer to Table 7 on
page 46. Make certain that the polarity is observed throughout the link.
For polarity information, refer to Figure 16 on page 47.

Type of Communication Card: Comm4


Refer to “Comm4 Card” on page 51.

Wiring Notes
To establish wiring connections between the UCM and the BCU, Trane
requires that you use the communication-link wiring specified in this-
manual. For wire selection specifications, see “UCM Communication-
Wire Characteristics” on page 55.
Use fiber-optic modems for building-to-building communication. If fiber
optics are not used, building-to-building communication wiring requires a
Transtector transient protector at each building. You can purchase Tran-
stector protectors through Trane. Contact your local Trane sales office for
details.
In a daisy chain configuration, use one pair of wires that start at the BCU
and go to all UCMs in a continuous loop. A branch configuration is possi-
ble if you need to tap into a daisy chain. Limit the total aggregate length
of the wiring for each communication link to 5,000 ft (1,524 m).
To connect communication wiring:
1. Attach one end of the communication-link wiring to TB2 on the BCU.
For the location of TB2, refer to Figure 16 on page 47.
2. Attach the other end of the communication-link wiring to the UPCM
at the ICS terminal. Refer to the UPCM installation literature for
connection points.
To connect shield:
Connect the shield at the BCU (TB2) to provide a drain for RFI/EMI, and
then splice it with other UPCM shields at the UPCM end. Tape the shield

BMTW-SVN01F-EN 117
Chapter 5 UCM Wiring and Addressing

at the last UPCM in the chain to prevent any connection between the
shield and ground (see Figure 55).

Note:
Observe the polarity throughout communication links.

IMPORTANT
UCM ground loops will cause a malfunction.

Figure 55. ICS Connections Between the BCU and UPCMs on a Comm4
Link

1
Link 1 2
3
4 Device #1 Device #2 Device #3
Link 2 5
6
7 Comm Link Comm Link Comm Link
Link 3 Terminal Block Terminal Block Terminal Block
8
9
10 Cut and tape
Link 4 11 Shield Shield Shield back the
shield wire.
12 Cut and tape Cut and tape Last device on
the shield the shield the Comm4 link
wires together. wires together.

Device Addressing
Each UCM must have a unique address on each link. On the UPCM, the
address is set with the SW1 address DIP switches (see Figure 56 on
page 119).
For UPCM DIP switch settings, refer to Table 22 on page 119. DIP switch
settings for BCU addresses 32 through 41 are shown in this table, but you
can place UPCMs anywhere from address 32 to 100.

118 BMTW-SVN01F-EN
Universal Programmable Control Module (UPCM) Interface

Figure 56. ICS Termination Points and DIP Switch Location on the
UPCM

Table 22. UPCM Address Settings

UPCM SW1 DIP Switch Settings

UCM Address 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

32 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF on OFF


33 on OFF OFF OFF OFF on OFF
34 OFF on OFF OFF OFF on OFF
35 on on OFF OFF OFF on OFF
36 OFF OFF on OFF OFF on OFF
37 on OFF on OFF OFF on OFF
38 OFF on on OFF OFF on OFF
39 on on on OFF OFF on OFF
40 OFF OFF OFF on OFF on OFF
41 on OFF OFF on OFF on OFF
Note:
DIP switch SW1-8 is not used. Set it to the off position.

BMTW-SVN01F-EN 119
Chapter 5 UCM Wiring and Addressing

VariTrac II Central Control Panel (CCP)


Interface
Description
The VariTrac system is a changeover bypass VAV system that controls
the temperature and mode of individual VAV zones, and also stages the
rooftop or air handler that serves the system. VariTrac systems are
applied with the use of a VariTrac II central control panel (CCP) that pro-
vides coordination, monitoring, and diagnostics for the VariTrac zone sys-
tem. It is responsible for communicating with, and the grouping of, up to
16 VAV units to determine space heating and cooling requirements, as
well as for selecting the mode and number of stages for the heating and
cooling unit to meet those needs.
The VariTrac II CCP can function as a standalone UCM whereby mode
control functions can be initiated via binary inputs from a time clock or
other contact closures. The VariTrac II CCP can also be controlled and
monitored from an upper level system, such as Tracer Summit, via a con-
nection to the BCU.
For information about the number of VariTrac II CCPs allowed per BCU
and per communication link, refer to Table 7 on page 46.
The following information summarizes VariTrac I and II compatibility
with Tracer Summit:
• VariTrac I comfort managers are not compatible with Tracer Summit,
and they cannot communicate with Tracer Summit.
• The VariTrac II CCP must use software version 2.2 to communicate
with Tracer Summit. CCPs with versions 1.x, 2.0, or 2.1 will not com-
municate with Tracer Summit. All future CCP software versions will
be Tracer Summit-compatible.
• VariTrac II CCPs using boards with revision levels 1 to 10 cannot be
upgraded to software version 2.2. The version 2.2 chip is only compat-
ible in revision level 11 boards or greater.
• CCPs with boards manufactured prior to revision level 11 cannot
communicate with Tracer Summit until the CCP board is replaced.
Contact your local Trane sales office for instructions.
• VariTrac II CCPs using boards with revision levels 11 to 14 can be
upgraded to software version 2.2 by replacing the chip in location
U-27.
• VariTrac II CCPs using boards with revision levels 15 and greater
already come equipped from the factory with software version 2.2 and
are fully compatible with Tracer Summit.

120 BMTW-SVN01F-EN
VariTrac II Central Control Panel (CCP) Interface

• The approximate manufacturing dates for CCP boards are shown


below:

Manufacturing Date Description

February 20, 1996 The CCP board transitioned from revision


level 10 to 11. Both board revisions were
available with software version 2.1; how-
ever, the PROM chip on each board (loca-
tion U-27) was physically different.
December 22, 1997 The CCP transitioned from revision level 14
to 15. The software version transitioned
from 2.1 to 2.2 on the same date.

• The CCP software version is shown on the label of the chip at location
U-27 on the board. For the chip’s location on the board, refer to
Figure 57 on page 122. The revision level of the board determines
whether previous software versions of the CCP can be upgraded to be
compatible with Tracer Summit.

BMTW-SVN01F-EN 121
Chapter 5 UCM Wiring and Addressing

Figure 57. Location of the DIP Switches on the VariTrac II CCP

Label indicates
the revision level
of the CCP board

Label on the chip


in location U27
indicates the
software version

Type of Communication Card: Isolated Comm3


Refer to “Isolated Comm3 Card” on page 49.

122 BMTW-SVN01F-EN
VariTrac II Central Control Panel (CCP) Interface

Wiring Notes
To establish wiring connections between the UCM and the BCU, Trane
requires that you use communication-link wiring specified in this man-
ual. For wire selection specifications, see “UCM Communication-Wire
Characteristics” on page 55.
Use fiber-optic modems for building-to-building communication. If fiber
optics are not used, building-to-building communication wiring requires a
Transtector transient protector at each building. You can purchase Tran-
stector protectors through Trane. Contact your local Trane sales office for
details.
In a daisy chain configuration, use one pair of wires that start at the BCU
and go to all UCMs in a continuous loop. A branch configuration is possi-
ble if you need to tap into a daisy chain. Limit the total aggregate length
of the wiring for each communication link to 5,000 ft (1,524 m).
To connect communication wiring:
1. Attach one end of the communication-link wiring to TB2 on the BCU.
For the location of TB2, refer to Figure 16 on page 47.
2. Attach the other end of the communication-link wiring to the Vari-
Trac II CCP at TB3-4 and TB3-5. For connection points, see Figure 46
on page 98.
To connect shield:
1. Connect the shield at the BCU (TB2) to provide a drain for RFI/EMI,
and then splice it with other CCP shields at the CCP end.
2. Tape the shield at the last CCP in the chain to prevent any connec-
tion between the shield and ground (see Figure 58 on page 124).

Note:
Observe the polarity throughout communication links.

IMPORTANT
UCM ground loops will cause a malfunction.

BMTW-SVN01F-EN 123
Chapter 5 UCM Wiring and Addressing

Figure 58. ICS Connections Between the BCU and the VariTrac II CCP
on an Isolated Comm3 Link

Device Addressing
Each UCM must have a unique address on each link. VariTrac II CCPs
can have an address from 1 through 32. The address is set with the S2
DIP switches and must match the address that was set in Site Configura-
tion for Tracer Summit.
• For details about setting the address, refer to the VariTrac II CCP lit-
erature.
• For VariTrac II CCP DIP switch settings, refer to Table 23 on
page 125.

124 BMTW-SVN01F-EN
VariTrac II Central Control Panel (CCP) Interface

Table 23. VariTrac II CCP DIP Switch Settings

VariTrac II CCP
S2 DIP Switch Settings
UCM Address

1 2 3 4 5

1 on OFF OFF OFF OFF


2 OFF on OFF OFF OFF
3 on on OFF OFF OFF
4 OFF OFF on OFF OFF
5 on OFF on OFF OFF
6 OFF on on OFF OFF
7 on on on OFF OFF
8 OFF OFF OFF on OFF
9 on OFF OFF on OFF
10 OFF on OFF on OFF
11 on on OFF on OFF
12 OFF OFF on on OFF
13 on OFF on on OFF
14 OFF on on on OFF
15 on on on on OFF
16 OFF OFF OFF OFF on
17 on OFF OFF OFF on
18 OFF on OFF OFF on
19 on on OFF OFF on
20 OFF OFF on OFF on
21 on OFF on OFF on
22 OFF on on OFF on
23 on on on OFF on
24 OFF OFF OFF on on
25 on OFF OFF on on
26 OFF on OFF on on
27 on on OFF on on
28 OFF OFF on on on
29 on OFF on on on
30 OFF on on on on
31 on on on on on
32 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF

BMTW-SVN01F-EN 125
Chapter 5 UCM Wiring and Addressing

VariTrane DDC/VAV UCMs Interface


Description
The VariTrane direct digital control/variable air volume (DDC/VAV)
UCMs (UCM I, UCM IA, UCM II, UCM III, and UCM IV) allow a Tracer
Summit system to monitor and control all models of the VariTrane DDC/
VAV boxes.
You can connect these units to any non-isolated Comm3 UCM communi-
cation link on TB2. The link provides a serial communication interface
between the BCU and each DDC/VAV in the system. For specific informa-
tion about the number of VAV I, II, III, or IVs allowed per BCU and per
communication link, refer to Table 7 on page 46. VAV I and VAV IA
UCMs reside on different communication links from VAV II, VAV III, and
VAV IV UCMs.

Type of Communication Card


VariTrane UCM I and UCM IA use the non-isolated Comm3 card. Soft-
ware setup refers to VariTrane UCMI and UCMIA as VAV I. Refer to
“Non-Isolated Comm3 Card” on page 50.
VariTrane UCM II, UCM III, and UCM IV use the Comm4 card. Software
setup refers to VariTrane UCM II, UCM III, and UCM IV as VAV II/III/
IV. Refer to “Comm4 Card” on page 51.

Wiring Notes
To establish wiring connections between the UCM and the BCU, Trane
requires that you use the communication-link wiring specified in this-
manual. For wire selection specifications, see “UCM Communication-
Wire Characteristics” on page 55.
Use fiber-optic modems for building-to-building communication. If fiber
optics are not used, building-to-building communication wiring requires a
Transtector transient protector at each building. You can purchase Tran-
stector protectors through Trane. Contact your local Trane sales office for
details.
In a daisy chain configuration, use one pair of wires that start at the BCU
and go to all UCMs in a continuous loop. A branch configuration is possi-
ble if you need to tap into a daisy chain. Limit the total aggregate length
of the wiring for each communication link to 5,000 ft (1,524 m).
To connect communication wiring:
1. Attach one end of the communication-link wiring to TB2 on the BCU.
For the location of TB2, refer to Figure 16 on page 47.
2. Attach the other end of the communication-link wiring to the VAV
communication terminal. Refer to the VAV UCM literature for con-
nection points.

126 BMTW-SVN01F-EN
VariTrane DDC/VAV UCMs Interface

To connect shield:
Connect the shield at the BCU (TB2) to provide a drain for RFI/EMI, and
then splice it with other VAV UCM shields at the VAV UCM end. Tape
the shield at the last VAV UCM in the chain to prevent any connection
between the shield and ground (see Figure 59).

Note:
Observe the polarity throughout communication links.

IMPORTANT
UCM ground loops will cause a malfunction.

Figure 59. ICS Connections Between the BCU and VAV II/III/IVs on a
Comm4 Link

1
Link 1 2
3
4 Device #1 Device #2 Device #3
Link 2 5
6
7 Comm Link Comm Link Comm Link
Link 3 Terminal Block Terminal Block Terminal Block
8
9
10 Cut and tape
Link 4 11 Shield Shield Shield back the
shield wire.
12 Cut and tape Cut and tape Last device on
the shield the shield the Comm4 link
wires together. wires together.

Device Addressing
Each UCM must have a unique address on each link. On the UCM, the
address is set with the S1 DIP switch (see Figure 60 on page 128).
• For VAV I and VAV IA DIP switch settings, refer to Table 25 on
page 131.
• For VAV II,VAV III, and VAV IV DIP settings, refer to Table 24 on
page 129.

BMTW-SVN01F-EN 127
Chapter 5 UCM Wiring and Addressing

Figure 60. Location of Address DIP Switch and UCM Communication


Link on VAV 1, VAV IA, VAV II, VAV III, and VAV IV

128 BMTW-SVN01F-EN
VariTrane DDC/VAV UCMs Interface

Table 24. VAV II, III, and IV Address Settings

VAV II, III, and IV DIP Switch Settings

UCM DIP 1 DIP 2 DIP 3 DIP 4 DIP 5 DIP 6


Address

65 OFF on on on on on
66 on OFF on on on on
67 OFF OFF on on on on
68 on on OFF on on on
69 OFF on OFF on on on
70 on OFF OFF on on on
71 OFF OFF OFF on on on
72 on on on OFF on on
73 OFF on on OFF on on
74 on OFF on OFF on on
75 OFF OFF on OFF on on
76 on on OFF OFF on on
77 OFF on OFF OFF on on
78 on OFF OFF OFF on on
79 OFF OFF OFF OFF on on
80 on on on on OFF on
81 OFF on on on OFF on
82 on OFF on on OFF on
83 OFF OFF on on OFF on
84 on on OFF on OFF on
85 OFF on OFF on OFF on
86 on OFF OFF on OFF on
87 OFF OFF OFF on OFF on
88 on on on OFF OFF on
89 OFF on on OFF OFF on
90 on OFF on OFF OFF on
91 OFF OFF on OFF OFF on
92 on on OFF OFF OFF on
93 OFF on OFF OFF OFF on
94 on OFF OFF OFF OFF on
95 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF on
96 on on on on on OFF
97 OFF on on on on OFF
98 on OFF on on on OFF
99 OFF OFF on on on OFF

BMTW-SVN01F-EN 129
Chapter 5 UCM Wiring and Addressing

Table 24. VAV II, III, and IV Address Settings (Continued)

VAV II, III, and IV DIP Switch Settings

UCM DIP 1 DIP 2 DIP 3 DIP 4 DIP 5 DIP 6


Address

100 on on OFF on on OFF


101 OFF on OFF on on OFF
102 on OFF OFF on on OFF
103 OFF OFF OFF on on OFF
104 on on on OFF on OFF
105 OFF on on OFF on OFF
106 on OFF on OFF on OFF
107 OFF OFF on OFF on OFF
108 on on OFF OFF on OFF
109 OFF on OFF OFF on OFF
110 on OFF OFF OFF on OFF
111 OFF OFF OFF OFF on OFF
112 on on on on OFF OFF
113 OFF on on on OFF OFF
114 on OFF on on OFF OFF
115 OFF OFF on on OFF OFF
116 on on OFF on OFF OFF
117 OFF on OFF on OFF OFF
118 on OFF OFF on OFF OFF
119 OFF OFF OFF on OFF OFF
120 on on on OFF OFF OFF
121 OFF on on OFF OFF OFF
122 on OFF on OFF OFF OFF
123 OFF OFF on OFF OFF OFF
124 on on OFF OFF OFF OFF
125 OFF on OFF OFF OFF OFF
126 on OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
127 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
Note:
Valid VAV II, III, and IV addresses are 65 to 127.

130 BMTW-SVN01F-EN
VariTrane DDC/VAV UCMs Interface

Table 25. VAV I and IA Address Settings

VAV I & IA DIP Switch Settings


UCM Address
DIP 1 DIP 2 DIP 3 DIP 4 DIP 5 DIP 6

1 OFF on on on on on
2 on OFF on on on on
3 OFF OFF on on on on
4 on on OFF on on on
5 OFF on OFF on on on
6 on OFF OFF on on on
7 OFF OFF OFF on on on
8 on on on OFF on on
9 OFF on on OFF on on
10 on OFF on OFF on on
11 OFF OFF on OFF on on
12 on on OFF OFF on on
13 OFF on OFF OFF on on
14 on OFF OFF OFF on on
15 OFF OFF OFF OFF on on
16 on on on on OFF on
17 OFF on on on OFF on
18 on OFF on on OFF on
19 OFF OFF on on OFF on
20 on on OFF on OFF on
21 OFF on OFF on OFF on
22 on OFF OFF on OFF on
23 OFF OFF OFF on OFF on
24 on on on OFF OFF on
25 OFF on on OFF OFF on
26 on OFF on OFF OFF on
27 OFF OFF on OFF OFF on
28 on on OFF OFF OFF on
29 OFF on OFF OFF OFF on
30 on OFF OFF OFF OFF on
31 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF on
32 on on on on on OFF
33 OFF on on on on OFF
34 on OFF on on on OFF
35 OFF OFF on on on OFF
36 on on OFF on on OFF

BMTW-SVN01F-EN 131
Chapter 5 UCM Wiring and Addressing

Table 25. VAV I and IA Address Settings (Continued)

VAV I & IA DIP Switch Settings


UCM Address
DIP 1 DIP 2 DIP 3 DIP 4 DIP 5 DIP 6

37 OFF on OFF on on OFF


38 on OFF OFF on on OFF
39 OFF OFF OFF on on OFF
40 on on on OFF on OFF
41 OFF on on OFF on OFF
42 on OFF on OFF on OFF
43 OFF OFF on OFF on OFF
44 on on OFF OFF on OFF
45 OFF on OFF OFF on OFF
46 on OFF OFF OFF on OFF
47 OFF OFF OFF OFF on OFF
48 on on on on OFF OFF
49 OFF on on on OFF OFF
50 on OFF on on OFF OFF
51 OFF OFF on on OFF OFF
52 on on OFF on OFF OFF
53 OFF on OFF on OFF OFF
54 on OFF OFF on OFF OFF
55 OFF OFF OFF on OFF OFF
56 on on on OFF OFF OFF
57 OFF on on OFF OFF OFF
58 on OFF on OFF OFF OFF
59 OFF OFF on OFF OFF OFF
60 on on OFF OFF OFF OFF
61 OFF on OFF OFF OFF OFF
62 on OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
63 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF

132 BMTW-SVN01F-EN
VAV Wireless Receiver Interface

VAV Wireless Receiver Interface


Description
The variable air volume (VAV) wireless receiver allows a Tracer Summit
system to monitor wireless thermostats. You can connect the wireless
receiver to any Comm4 UCM communication link on TB2. The link pro-
vides a serial communication interface between the BCU and each wire-
less receiver in the system. For specific information about the number of
wireless receivers allowed per BCU and per communication link, refer to
Table 7 on page 46.

Type of Communication Card: Comm4


Refer to “Comm4 Card” on page 51.

Wiring Notes
To establish wiring connections between the UCM and the BCU, Trane
requires that you use the communication-link wiring specified in this
manual. For wire selection specifications, see “UCM Communication-
Wire Characteristics” on page 55.
Use fiber-optic modems for building-to-building communication. If fiber
optics are not used, building-to-building communication wiring requires a
Transtector transient protector at each building. You can purchase Tran-
stector protectors through Trane. Contact your local Trane sales office for
details.
In a daisy chain configuration, use one pair of wires that start at the BCU
and go to all UCMs in a continuous loop. A branch configuration is possi-
ble if you need to tap into a daisy chain. Limit the total aggregate length
of the wiring for each communication link to 5,000 ft (1,524 m).
To connect communication wiring:
Attach one end of the communication-link wiring to TB2 on the BCU. For
the location of TB2, refer to Figure 16 on page 47. The wireless receiver
ships from the factory with wire terminations completed inside the
receiver. The wire protruding through conduit on the back side of the unit
is ready to be spliced. To identify which color to use when splicing com-
munication-link wiring, refer to Figure 61 on page 134.

BMTW-SVN01F-EN 133
Chapter 5 UCM Wiring and Addressing

Figure 61. VAV Wireless Receiver Address DIP Switch Location and
Wire Designations

To connect shield:
1. Connect the shield at the BCU (TB2) to provide a drain for RFI/EMI,
and then splice it with other VAV wireless receiver shields at the
VAV wireless receiver end.

134 BMTW-SVN01F-EN
VAV Wireless Receiver Interface

2. Tape the shield at the last VAV wireless receiver in the chain to pre-
vent any connection between the shield and ground (see Figure 62 on
page 135).

Note:
Observe the polarity throughout communication links.

IMPORTANT
UCM ground loops will cause a malfunction.

Figure 62. ICS Connections Between the BCU and VAV Wireless
Receivers on a Comm4 Link

1
Link 1 2
3
4 Device #1 Device #2 Device #3
Link 2 5
6
7 Comm Link Comm Link Comm Link
Link 3 Terminal Block Terminal Block Terminal Block
8
9
10 Cut and tape
Link 4 11 Shield Shield Shield back the
shield wire.
12 Cut and tape Cut and tape Last device on
the shield the shield the Comm4 link
wires together. wires together.

Device Addressing
Each UCM must have a unique address on each link. wireless receivers
can have an address from 1 through 31. The address is set with the DIP
switches located on the side of the wireless receiver (see Figure 61 on
page 134). For VAV wireless receiver DIP switch settings, refer to
Table 26 on page 136.

BMTW-SVN01F-EN 135
Chapter 5 UCM Wiring and Addressing

Table 26. VAV Wireless Receiver Address Settings

VAV Wireless Receiver DIP Switch Settings


UCM Address
DIP 1 DIP 2 DIP 3 DIP 4 DIP 5

1 OFF on on on on
2 on OFF on on on
3 OFF OFF on on on
4 on on OFF on on
5 OFF on OFF on on
6 on OFF OFF on on
7 OFF OFF OFF on on
8 on on on OFF on
9 OFF on on OFF on
10 on OFF on OFF on
11 OFF OFF on OFF on
12 on on OFF OFF on
13 OFF on OFF OFF on
14 on OFF OFF OFF on
15 OFF OFF OFF OFF on
16 on on on on OFF
17 OFF on on on OFF
18 on OFF on on OFF
19 OFF OFF on on OFF
20 on on OFF on OFF
21 OFF on OFF on OFF
22 on OFF OFF on OFF
23 OFF OFF OFF on OFF
24 on on on OFF OFF
25 OFF on on OFF OFF
26 on OFF on OFF OFF
27 OFF OFF on OFF OFF
28 on on OFF OFF OFF
29 OFF on OFF OFF OFF
30 on OFF OFF OFF OFF
31 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
Note:

• DIP switches 6 and 7 are not used. Set them to the on position.
• DIP switch 8 is the Setup/Normal switch. Set it to the on/normal position.

136 BMTW-SVN01F-EN
Voyager Rooftop Unit Interface

Voyager Rooftop Unit Interface


Description
Tracer Summit can monitor, control, and configure Voyager rooftop units.
The Voyager interface provides a communication link between the BCU
and each Voyager rooftop unit. For specific information about the number
of Voyagers allowed per BCU and per communication link, refer to
Table 7 on page 46.

Type of Communication Card: Comm3 or Comm4


Refer to “Isolated Comm3 Card” on page 49 and “Comm4 Card” on
page 51.
Voyager rooftop units must have the Trane communication interface
(TCI-3) module installed in order to communicate with Tracer Summit.
The daughter board on the TCI-3 must be configured for a “non-isolated
Comm3 or Comm4 card” (see Figure 63) when connected to a BCU
Comm4 link. Tracer Summit includes isolated Comm3 support, which
allows the Voyager to communicate to a BCU isolated Comm3 link. When
using this configuration, the TRI-3 daughter board must be configured for
“isolated Comm3” by rotating the daughter board clockwise 90° from the
position shown in Figure 63 so that “Isolated Comm3” is at the bottom.
Refer to the Trane Communication Interface (TCI-3) installation, opera-
tion, and maintenance literature for more information on configuring the
TCI-3.

Figure 63. Location of Address DIP Switches and Communication-Link


Terminations on the Voyager Rooftop Unit UCM

BMTW-SVN01F-EN 137
Chapter 5 UCM Wiring and Addressing

Wiring Notes
To establish wiring connections between the UCM and the BCU, Trane
requires that you use the communication-link wiring specified in this
manual. For wire selection specifications, see “UCM Communication-
Wire Characteristics” on page 55.
Use fiber-optic modems for building-to-building communication. If fiber
optics are not used, building-to-building communication wiring requires a
Transtector transient protector at each building. You can purchase Tran-
stector protectors through Trane. Contact your local Trane sales office for
details.
In a daisy chain configuration, use one pair of wires that start at the BCU
and go to all UCMs in a continuous loop. A branch configuration is possi-
ble if you need to tap into a daisy chain. Limit the total aggregate length
of the wiring for each communication link to 5,000 ft (1,524 m).
To connect communication wiring:
1. Attach one end of the communication-link wiring to TB2 on the BCU.
For the location of TB2, refer to Figure 16 on page 47.
2. Attach the other end of the communication-link wiring to the Voyager
UCM at the TB2-(+) and TB2-(-) terminals on the TC2-3 board as
shown in Figure 63 on page 137.
To connect shield:
1. Connect the shield at the BCU (TB2) to provide a drain for RFI/EMI,
and then splice it with other Voyager rooftops shields at the Voyager
rooftop end.
2. Tape the shield at the last Voyager rooftop in the chain to prevent
any connection between the shield and ground (see Figure 64 on
page 139).

Note:
Observe the polarity throughout communication links.

IMPORTANT
UCM ground loops will cause a malfunction.

138 BMTW-SVN01F-EN
Voyager Rooftop Unit Interface

Figure 64. ICS Connections Between the BCU and Voyager Rooftop
Unit UCMs on a Comm3 or Comm4 Link

1
Link 1 2
3
4 Device #1 Device #2 Device #3
Link 2 5
6
7 Comm Link Comm Link Comm Link
Link 3 Terminal Block Terminal Block Terminal Block
8
9
10 Cut and tape
Link 4 11 Shield Shield Shield back the
shield wire.
12 Cut and tape Cut and tape Last device on
the shield the shield the Comm4 link
wires together. wires together.

Device Addressing
Each UCM must have a unique address on each link. Voyagers can have
an address from 50 through 81. The Voyager address is set using DIP
switches on the TCI-3 board and must match the address set in Site Con-
figuration for Tracer Summit. Refer to the TCI-3 literature for more
details about setting the address.
• For the DIP switch locations on the TCI-3 board, see Figure 63 on
page 137.
• For Voyager address DIP switch settings, refer to Table 27.
Table 27. Voyager Rooftop Unit UCM Address Settings

TCI Board DIP Switch Settings


UCM
Address
SW1-2 SW1-3 SW1-4 SW1-5 SW1-6

50 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF


51 OFF OFF OFF OFF on
52 OFF OFF OFF on OFF
53 OFF OFF OFF on on
54 OFF OFF on OFF OFF
55 OFF OFF on OFF on
56 OFF OFF on on OFF
57 OFF OFF on on on
58 OFF on OFF OFF OFF
59 OFF on OFF OFF on
60 OFF on OFF on OFF
61 OFF on OFF on on

BMTW-SVN01F-EN 139
Chapter 5 UCM Wiring and Addressing

Table 27. Voyager Rooftop Unit UCM Address Settings (Continued)

TCI Board DIP Switch Settings


UCM
Address
SW1-2 SW1-3 SW1-4 SW1-5 SW1-6

62 OFF on on OFF OFF


63 OFF on on OFF on
64 OFF on on on OFF
65 OFF on on on on
66 on OFF OFF OFF OFF
67 on OFF OFF OFF on
68 on OFF OFF on OFF
68 on OFF OFF on on
70 on OFF on OFF OFF
71 on OFF on OFF on
72 on OFF on on OFF
73 on OFF on on on
74 on on OFF OFF OFF
75 on on OFF OFF on
76 on on OFF on OFF
77 on on OFF on on
78 on on on OFF OFF
79 on on on OFF on
80 on on on on OFF
81 on on on on on
Note:
• SW1-1 is used to enable (switch on) or disable (switch off) the normally closed High
Temperature Limit Switch input (TB2 on the TCI-3 board).
• Cycle power off/on after changing switch settings.

Comm5 UCMs
Trane’s Comm5 protocol is a high-speed communications link that uses
LonTalk® protocol. Comm5 offers many benefits, including:
• High-speed (78,000 bps) communications
• Open protocol support
• Neuron ID numbers that replace UCM addresses
• Polarity of wiring not sensitive

140 BMTW-SVN01F-EN
Comm5 UCMs

Description of Types
The following types of UCMs communicate with BCUs using a Comm5
communication link. For specific information about the number of each of
these types of UCMs allowed per BCU and per communications link, refer
to Table 7 on page 46.

Tracer AH540 and Tracer AH541 Air-Handler Controllers


The Tracer AH540 (factory-installed) and Tracer AH541 (field-installed)
air-handler controllers monitor and control Trane air handlers. The
Tracer AH540/541 controller supports three air-handler control
sequences: constant volume (CV) controlled by space temperature, CV
with discharge temperature control, and variable air volume (VAV).
Tracer Summit software supports the Tracer AH540/541 controller by
using the LonMark™ Space Comfort Controller (SCC) profile or Dis-
charge Air Controller (DAC) profile. The object type used depends on the
sequence selected as part of the Tracer AH540/541 configuration (see
Table 28).
Table 28. Tracer AH540/541 control sequences in Tracer Summit

Tracer Summit Object


Unit Sequence Type

Space Temperature SCC


Discharge Temperature DAC
VAV DAC

The Tracer AH540/541 controller needs to be configured (either at the fac-


tory or in the field with the Rover service tool) before connecting it to the
BCU.

Tracer Loop Controller Interface


The Tracer loop controller allows a Tracer Summit system to monitor and
control water-source heat pump systems.

Tracer MP501 Controller


The Tracer MP501 controller is a configurable, multi-purpose controller
used to provide direct-digital control for HVAC equipment. The Tracer
MP501 provides a single control loop with the following output types: 2-
stage, tri-state modulating, and 0–10 Vdc analog.
The controller can be configured to conform to the LonMark™ SCC pro-
file or as a generic LonTalk® device (GLD object). In SCC mode, the
Tracer MP501 controls space temperature to an active setpoint. SCC
mode supports the following applications:
• Heating control loop
• Cooling control loop
• Two-pipe heat/cool automatic changeover using a communicated sup-
ply water temperature value

BMTW-SVN01F-EN 141
Chapter 5 UCM Wiring and Addressing

In generic mode, the Tracer MP501 provides control flexibility in a vari-


ety of applications that do not necessarily follow a LonMark™ profile.
The control loop accepts inputs of the following types: temperature, pres-
sure, flow, percent, or parts per million (ppm). Generic mode supports
many applications including:
• Fan speed control based on duct static pressure
• Pump speed control based on water differential pressure or flow
• Humidifier control based on space or duct relative humidity

Tracer MP503 I/O Module


The Tracer MP503 input/output (I/O) module is a field-installed module
used to monitor inputs and control binary outputs. The module has four
universal inputs that can be configured as binary, thermistor, 0–20 mA,
or 0–10 Vdc, as well as four binary outputs. The MP503 I/O module
communicates with Tracer Summit by using the Generic LonTalk®
Device (GLD) object.

Tracer MP580 and Tracer MP581 Controllers


The multi-purpose Tracer MP580 (factory-installed) and Tracer MP581
(field-installed) controllers provide control for many types of HVAC
equipment, including air handlers, chillers, pumps, and generic loads
through the use of generic inputs and outputs. The Tracer MP580/581
controller requires customized Tracer Graphical Programming and con-
figurations using Rover service tool software Version 3.0 or higher.
The Tracer MP580/581 controller has three possible configurations: a
completely generic, programmable configuration (called a No Profile con-
figuration), a configuration conforming to the LonMark™ DAC profile,
and a configuration conforming to the LonMark™ SCC profile. The DAC
and SCC configurations enable the Tracer MP580/581 to use the appro-
priate LonMark™ profile to send information to and receive information
from the Tracer Summit BCU, in addition to using the generic variables
of the No Profile configuration. The Tracer MP580/581 needs to have the
correct configuration (selected through the Rover service tool) before
Tracer Summit connects to it. Despite the configuration names of DAC
and SCC, Tracer Summit always treats the Tracer MP580/581 controller
as a Tracer MP580/581 object rather than as a DAC or SCC object.

Tracer Zone Controllers


Tracer zone controllers monitor and control equipment such as fan coils,
classroom unit ventilators, water-source heat pumps, and blower coils.
Trane zone controllers include the following: factory-installed Tracer
ZN524, ZN510 and ZN520 and field-installed Tracer ZN511, ZN517, and
ZN521. These controllers communicates with Tracer Summit using the
Space Comfort Controller (SCC) object.

Tracer VV550 and Tracer VV551 controllers


The Tracer VV550 (factory-installed) and Tracer 551 (field-installed) con-
trollers provide digital control for variable air volume (VAV) boxes and

142 BMTW-SVN01F-EN
Comm5 UCMs

communicate with a Tracer Summit BAS by using Comm5, Trane’s


implementation of LonTalk® communications protocol. The controller con-
forms to the LonMark™ Space Comfort Controller (SCC) profile and
interfaces to Tracer Summit through the SCC object. System coordination
of the Tracer VV550/551 controllers and their associated air handler is
accomplished with the new VAV air system (VAS) application designed
specifically for Comm5 controllers.

Generic LonTalk® Devices


LonTalk® devices support LonTalk® protocol but do not meet the Lon-
Mark™ profiles that Tracer Summit software supports, such as SCC or
DAC. However, LonTalk® devices can be connected to Tracer Summit as
Generic LonTalk® Device (GLD) objects. GLDs must support LonMark™
standard network variable types (SNVTs). The BCU integrates these
devices into Tracer Summit by mapping SNVTs to standard BACnet
objects (AIP, AOP, BIP, BOP). These BACnet objects can then be used in
various Tracer Summit applications, such as TOD scheduling, graphics,
and CPL programs.
The BCU gets the information it needs for mapping SNVTs to standard
BACnet objects from an external interface file (XIF). You will need to
transfer this information to the Tracer Summit PC Workstation. The XIF
file is supplied by the manufacturer of the generic LonTalk® device.
Generic LonTalk® devices include: variable frequency drives (VFDs),
meters, occupancy sensors, actuators, and I/O modules. Typically, these
devices will be pre-configured by the original equipment manufacturer.
For detailed information about generic LonTalk® devices and how they
operate in Tracer Summit, refer to Tracer Summit Connections to Non-
Trane LonTalk® Devices (BAS-PRB003-EN).

Type of Communication Card: Comm5


Refer to “Comm5 Card” on page 52.

Wiring Notes
To establish wiring connections between UCM and the BCU, Trane
requires that you use the communication-link wiring specified in this
manual. For wire selection specifications, see “Communication-Link
Wire” on page 54.
To connect communication wiring:
1. Attach one end of the communication-link wiring to TB2 on the BCU.
For the location of TB2 (refer to Figure 16 on page 47).
2. Attach the other end of the communication-link wiring to the UCM or
the LonTalk® device at the appropriate terminal. For UCM connec-
tion points, refer to Trane’s installation, operation, and maintenance
manuals for Comm5 UCMs or the manufacturer’s literature for the
appropriate device.

BMTW-SVN01F-EN 143
Chapter 5 UCM Wiring and Addressing

Termination resistors are required for correct installation of UCMs on the


Comm5 link. See “Termination Resistance Placement for Comm5 Links”
on page 59.

Neuron ID
Each Comm5 UCM or LonTalk® device is assigned a unique identification
number called a Neuron ID. The Neuron ID number is typically printed
on a label located on the logic board of each UCM. You can view the Neu-
ron ID number from Tracer Summit when communication is established.
An example Neuron ID format is 00-01-64-1C-2B-00. (See the Tracer
Summit System Programming guide.)

Comm5 Zone Sensor Communication Jack


Many Trane zone sensor models include a communication jack. When
properly wired to the communication terminals on the unit controller, the
communication jack provides easy access to both the controller and the
entire Comm5 link. This enables you to access the status and configura-
tion information of any controller on the link using a service tool.
The recommended wire between the controller and the communication
jack is 22-gauge, Level 4 wire; or 18-gauge, shielded, twisted-pair with
stranded, tinned-copper conductors (Trane “purple” wire). Thermostat
wire is not recommended for the communication jack.

Zone Sensor Communication Stubs


The wire that runs between the controller and zone sensor is commonly
referred to as the communication stub. Figure 65 on page 145 shows an
example of communication stubs on a Comm5 link when a repeater is
used.

Note:
• Only 8 stubs can be used per Comm5 link. To add more
stubs to the link, a repeater is necessary. Up to 8 stubs may
be used on each side of the repeater (16 total stubs).
• Each communication stub must not exceed 50 feet in
length.

144 BMTW-SVN01F-EN
Comm5 UCMs

Figure 65. Communication Stubs used with a Repeater

Repeater

b
b

u
u

m
m

st
st

m
m

o
o

C
C

Figure Note:
• Maximum wire length on either side of the repeater is 4,500 ft (1,400 m).
• The link repeater is limited to 60 devices on either side of the link.
• *Termination resistors placed at the end of each link. The resistance value of
the termination resistor is 105-ohm resistor for Level 4 wire at each end of the
link. For Trane “purple” wire use an 82-ohm resistor at each end of the link.

BMTW-SVN01F-EN 145
Chapter 5 UCM Wiring and Addressing

146 BMTW-SVN01F-EN
Chapter 6

Network Wiring

This chapter discusses the following topics related to network wiring:


• The various network configurations that are possible with Tracer
Summit
• The various cable configurations connecting BCUs, PC Workstations,
and hubs within a network—referred to as network topologies: bus
topology, star topology, bus/star topology
• Networks using Ethernet communication
• Networks using ARCNET communication
• Installing coaxial cable connectors
• Internet Protocol (IP) installation procedures
• EIA-232 communication

Network Communication
Configurations
Tracer Summit uses BACnet for communication over LANs made up of
Tracer Summit BCUs and PC Workstations. Each BCU and PC Worksta-
tion must have a network card installed in order to operate on a Tracer
Summit network. The card can be either Ethernet or ARCNET.
Modular BCUs (BMTW) have the following characteristics that affect net-
work communication:
• Can exist on either a dedicated or a shared network (see Figure 66
and Figure 67 on page 148)

Note:
For shared Ethernet IP networks, the corresponding IP
addressing for modular BCUs (BMTW) and PC Workstations
must be coordinated with the building LAN administrator.

• Are compatible with only Tracer Summit Version 11 or higher ver-


sions of software
BCUs (BMTS) have the following characteristics that affect network com-
munication:
• Can exist only on a dedicated Ethernet or ARCNET network (see
Figure 66 on page 148)
• Are compatible with Tracer Summit software Version 5 or higher

BMTW-SVN01F-EN 147
Chapter 6 Network Wiring

Tracer Summit PC Workstations


The software version on a Tracer Summit PC Workstation determines the
type of network it is able to exist on.
Tracer Summit PC Workstations with Version 11 or higher software:
• Can communicate with BCUs (BMTS) and modular BCUs (BMTW)
• Can exist on either a dedicated BACnet network or a shared IP
network

Figure 66. Dedicated Tracer Summit Network

Ethernet or ARCNET

TRACER SUMMIT ALM PWR


TRACER SUMMIT ALM PWR
TRACER SUMMIT ALM PWR

Additional Tracer Summit Additional BCUs


BCU (BMTW) BCU (BMTS)
Tracer Summit PC Workstation (BMTW or BMTS)
PC Workstations

Figure 67. Shared Tracer Summit Network

To other
IP network
devices Ethernet IP

TRACER SUMMIT ALM PWR TRACER SUMMIT ALM PWR


TRACER SUMMIT ALM PWR

Additional Tracer Summit BCU (BMTW) Additional


BCU (BMTW)
Tracer Summit PC Workstation with Operator BCUs (BMTW)
PC Workstations Display

148 BMTW-SVN01F-EN
Network Communication Configurations

Connecting Dedicated and Shared Networks


Dedicated BACnet networks and shared IP networks can be connected to
one another by BACnet/IP routers (see Figure 68).

Figure 68. Tracer Summit Mixed Network


Dedicated Network

Ethernet or ARCNET

TRACER SUMMIT ALM PWR


TRACER SUMMIT ALM PWR
TRACER SUMMIT ALM PWR

BACnet/IP
Router
Additional Tracer Summit Additional BCUs
BCU (BMTW) BCU (BMTS)
Tracer Summit PC Workstation (BMTW or BMTS)
PC Workstations

To other
Shared Network
IP network
devices
Ethernet IP

TRACER SUMMIT TRACER SUMMIT ALM PWR


ALM PWR
TRACER SUMMIT ALM PWR

Additional Tracer Summit Additional


BCU (BMTW) BCU (BMTW)
Tracer Summit PC Workstation BCUs (BMTW)
with Operator
PC Workstations
Display

BACnet—Device IDs
Each device (BCU, PC Workstation, non-Trane BACnet device) must
have a device ID. For the BCU (BMTS), the device ID is set via DIP
switch (S2) on the BCU logic board. The valid range for a DIP switch is 1
through 255. For the modular BCU (BMTW), the device ID can be set via
DIP switch (S2) on the BCU logic board or by software (using the IP Vali-
dation utility). The valid range for a DIP switch is 1 through 254. A DIP
switch set to 255 tells the BCU (BMTW) to allow a software set (“softset”)
device ID instead. The valid range of a softset device address is 1 through
4194303.

BMTW-SVN01F-EN 149
Chapter 6 Network Wiring

Trane recommends that the first BCU device start at address 01 and that
all additional BCUs be incremented sequentially. For the location of the
BCU logic board DIP switch, see Figure 69.
In the PC, the device ID is set up as part of site configuration. If ARCNET
is used, always set the ARCNET address to match the device ID (see
Table 29 on page 151).

Figure 69. BCU (BMTW) Device ID: DIP Switch Location

SET UP TOOL BCU I/O module


ONLY
cable

BCU DIP Switch (S2) 4 AMP MAX

Location

ON OFF Optional BCU I/O


S2 ON
module

UCM communication
card slots

Operator Seven-segment
display socket LED display
High capacity
card slot
Standard capacity Option card
card slot slots

150 BMTW-SVN01F-EN
Network Topology

Table 29. BCU Device ID: DIP Switch Settings

DIP Switch Number


Device ID
S2-1 S2-2 S2-3 S2-4 S2-5 S2-6 S2-7 S2-8

01 OFF on on on on on on on
02 on OFF on on on on on on
03 OFF OFF on on on on on on
04 on on OFF on on on on on
05 OFF on OFF on on on on on
06 on OFF OFF on on on on on
07 OFF OFF OFF on on on on on
08 on on on OFF on on on on
09 OFF on on OFF on on on on
10 on OFF on OFF on on on on
11 OFF OFF on OFF on on on on
12 on on OFF OFF on on on on
13 OFF on OFF OFF on on on on
14 on OFF OFF OFF on on on on
15 OFF OFF OFF OFF on on on on
16 on on on on OFF on on on
255 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
Note:
• For the BCU (BMTS), the device ID can be set from 1 to 255 using the DIP switch. For the BCU (BMTW), the device ID can be set
from 1 to 254 using the DIP switch or 1 to 4194303 when softset. To softset the address on a BCU (BMTW), set the DIP switch to
255 (all OFF), then use the IP Validation utility to edit the desired address.
• Cycle system power to reset the device ID configuration.

Network Topology
Topology refers to the various configurations of cables connecting BCUs,
PC Workstations, and hubs within a network. The LAN system supports
bus, star, and bus/star combination topologies. The following sections
describe the installation requirements for these types of topologies.

BMTW-SVN01F-EN 151
Chapter 6 Network Wiring

For information about maximum cable length and maximum cable dis-
tance between two devices on a communication link, refer to Table 30.
Table 30. Network Wiring Distance Limits

Ethernet LAN

Maximum Number of Minimum Cable Distance


Maximum Total Cable
Cable/Wire Type Devices (BCUs and PC Between 2 Devices on a
Length* Workstations) Link

RG-58 Coaxial Cable


607 ft (185 m) 30 1.64 ft (0.5 m)
(10Base2)
Twisted-Pair Wire
328 ft (100 m) — 1.64 ft (0.5 m)
(10BaseT)

ARCNET LAN

Maximum Number of Minimum Cable Distance


Cable Type Maximum Total Cable Length† Devices (BCUs and PC Between 2 Devices on a
Workstations) Link

Bus and Bus/Star Topology:


1,000 ft (304 m)
RG-62 Coaxial Cable 8 6 ft (1.8 m)
Star Topology: 1,450 ft
(442 m)
* You can obtain additional distances and devices by using an Ethernet hub.
† You can obtain additional distances and devices by adding an ARCNET active hub.

Bus Topology
Bus topology can be used only with coaxial cable. A typical bus topology
for an ARCNET LAN used with Tracer Summit is shown in Figure 70 on
page 153.

152 BMTW-SVN01F-EN
Network Topology

Figure 70. Typical Tracer Summit (ARCNET) Bus Topology

Ethernet LAN
For information about maximum cable length and maximum cable dis-
tance between two devices on a communication link, refer to Table 30 on
page 152. Termination is provided by installing a 50 Ω BNC terminator.

Note:
For further information on designing an Ethernet network,
refer to BAS-EB-70 (Tracer Summit for Windows and Ether-
net).

ARCNET LAN
In the bus configuration, use high impedance transceiver cards (those
ARCNET cards specified by Trane). For information about maximum
cable length and maximum cable distance between two devices on a com-
munication link, refer to Table 30 on page 152. Termination is provided
by installing a 93 Ω BNC terminator.

Star Topology
Star topology requires the use of hubs. A typical star topology for the
ARCNET LAN used with Tracer Summit is shown in Figure 71 on
page 154.

BMTW-SVN01F-EN 153
Chapter 6 Network Wiring

Figure 71. Typical Tracer Summit (ARCNET) Star Topology

Ethernet LAN
For information about maximum cable length and maximum cable dis-
tance between two devices on a communication link, refer to Table 30 on
page 152. Termination is provided by installing a 50 Ω BNC terminator.

Note:
For further information on designing an Ethernet network,
refer to BAS-EB-70, Tracer Summit for Windows and Ethernet.

ARCNET LAN
Each coaxial cable must be terminated with 93 Ω terminators at the
devices, but not at the hub. For information about maximum cable length
and maximum cable distance between two devices on a communication
link, refer to Table 30 on page 152. The hub cards install into one of the
BCU card slots and use the BCU power for operation.
The maximum distance from a fiber-optic hub to a terminating device is
6,000 ft (1,829 m). This distance depends on the decibel loss of the com-
munication link. Refer to “Fiber-Optic Cable—Ethernet and ARCNET” on
page 7 for more information.

Combination Bus/Star Topology


To bridge a bus topology to a star topology requires a hub that acts as
both a terminator for the bus and a signal repeater for the network. It is
basically the same as the star topology, with the addition of devices set up

154 BMTW-SVN01F-EN
Network Topology

in the bus topology at each hub. A typical bus/star topology for an


ARCNET LAN used with Tracer Summit is shown in Figure 72.

Figure 72. Typical Tracer Summit (ARCNET) Bus/Star Topology

Ethernet LAN
For information about maximum cable length and maximum cable dis-
tance between two devices on a communication link, refer to Table 30 on
page 152. Termination is provided by installing a 50 Ω BNC terminator.

Note:
For further information on designing an Ethernet network,
refer to BAS-EB-70, Tracer Summit for Windows and Ethernet.

ARCNET LAN
For information about maximum cable length and maximum cable dis-
tance between two devices on a communication link, refer to Table 30 on
page 152. Termination is provided by installing a 93 Ω BNC terminator.

BMTW-SVN01F-EN 155
Chapter 6 Network Wiring

Calculating Delays
Note:
There are no propagation delays in an Ethernet LAN.

In a conventional ARCNET LAN, the maximum propagation delay


between any two devices cannot exceed 31 µs (microseconds). When calcu-
lating propagation delays, the delay experienced from a hub or cable must
be known. Use Table 31 to calculate propagation delays that are usually
only a problem on geographically large systems.

Table 31. ARCNET LAN Propagation Delays

ARCNET Component Delay

Active hub 0.25 µs/hub


RG-62 coaxial cable 0.12 µs/100 ft (30 m)
62.5 µm (micrometer) 0.15 µs/100 ft (30 m)
fiber-optic cable

Although active hubs do not introduce significant delays, the arbitrary


rule is that you cannot cascade more than 10 active hubs in one network.
Assuming 1,450 ft (442 m) links between hubs and 1,450 ft (442 m) links
between the end hubs and devices, a 15,950 ft long (4,861 m) network
results with RG-62/U coaxial cable. This network has a propagation delay
of 19.14 µs, which is within the 31 µs limit for ARCNET. Contact Trane
for systems that exceed 31 µs.
The following example shows how to calculate a propagation delay. Fiber-
optic propagation delay is calculated in the same manner.

Total feet × delay = propagation delay


In feet:
15,950 ft × 0.12 µs/100 ft = 19.14 µs
In meters:
4,681 m × 0.12 µs/30 m = 19.14 µs

Ethernet Communication
An Ethernet LAN system used with Tracer Summit can support many
combinations of BCUs and PC Workstations. All devices (BCUs and PC
Workstations) in a LAN system must have standard Ethernet hardware
installed.

156 BMTW-SVN01F-EN
ARCNET Communication

Ethernet Network Interface Card


The Ethernet network interface card provides for a single coaxial cable or
twisted-pair wire. It is used for input to a BCU from a bus or star configu-
ration (see “Network Topology” on page 151).
When configuring the interface card, follow these guidelines:
• Use the manufacturer’s utility disk when installing the card on a PC.
• For the BCU, use an Ethernet card provided by Trane. This card is
set to the proper interrupt and memory settings.

Configuring an Ethernet Card


There are no jumpers or DIP switches to set on the Ethernet card, and it
is ready to configure as soon as you plug it in.

Installing an Ethernet Card in the BCU Panel

nCAUTION
Hazardous Voltage!
Turn off power at the BCU before installing the Ethernet card. Failure to
turn off power before servicing may result in human injury or damage
to equipment.

To install an Ethernet card in a BCU panel:


1. Choose one of the open slots in the ISA card bus.
2. Remove the screw from the card mounting bracket.
3. Insert the card into the slot and secure it in place with the mounting
screw.

ARCNET Communication
An ARCNET LAN system used with Tracer Summit can support many
combinations of BCUs and PC Workstations. A coaxial input or fiber-optic
input ARCNET interface card is required in each BCU for ARCNET LAN
communication. In addition, a variety of ARCNET hub cards are avail-
able.
Use hub cards to do any of the following:
• Configure the LAN in a star topology (see “Star Topology” on
page 153)
• Extend the length of the ARCNET LAN
• Convert from fiber-optic cable to coaxial cable, or convert from coaxial
cable to fiber-optic cable
“Configuring an ARCNET Card” on page 159 defines all ARCNET cards
currently supported by the Tracer Summit BCU.

BMTW-SVN01F-EN 157
Chapter 6 Network Wiring

Each PC Workstation on the ARCNET LAN also requires an ARCNET


interface card. The following sections briefly describe the ARCNET inter-
face cards and hub cards. For information regarding applicable ARCNET
interface cards and their installation, refer to “Installing an ARCNET
Card” on page 163.

Note:
Only ISA ARCNET cards may be used in the BCU because the
BCU does not have a PCI bus.

ARCNET Single Coaxial Input Interface Card


This ARCNET card provides for a single coaxial input. It is used for input
to a BCU from a bus or star configuration (see “Network Topology” on
page 151). This card is required even if a hub card is installed in the
BCU. It has DIP switches and address jumpers that should be configured
prior to installation in the BCU. This card always requires the use of a
tee connector. For a listing of the ARCNET single coaxial input interface
cards and their respective settings currently supported by Trane, see
“Configuring an ARCNET Card” on page 159.

ARCNET Single Fiber-Optic Input Interface Card


This card provides for a single input from a fiber-optic hub card. This card
is required even if a fiber-optic hub card is installed in the BCU. It has
DIP switches and address jumpers that should be configured prior to
installation in the BCU. For a listing of the ARCNET single fiber-optic
input interface cards (and their respective settings) currently supported
by Trane, see “Configuring an ARCNET Card” on page 159.

ARCNET Three Input Coaxial Hub Card


This ARCNET card provides a central point (hub) where you can link one
coaxial ARCNET link to up to two other coaxial links. You can configure
each of these coaxial links in a star or bus configuration. See “Network
Topology” on page 151 for further details. This card has address jumpers
that should be configured prior to installation in the BCU. For a listing of
the ARCNET hub cards (and their respective settings) currently sup-
ported by Trane, see Figure 73 on page 161.
The coaxial hub card does not connect the BCU to the LAN. You must
provide a separate ARCNET single coaxial interface card for this purpose.
The BCU merely supplies the hub card with power. For a list of the ARC-
NET single coaxial interface cards currently supported by Trane, see
Figure 73 on page 161.

Note:
Do not use tee connectors on any type of hub card. The coaxial
cable is connected directly to the BNC connector on the hub
card.

158 BMTW-SVN01F-EN
ARCNET Communication

ARCNET Two Coaxial/One Fiber-Optic Hub Card


You can use this multi-purpose ARCNET hub card for these purposes:
• Use it as a hub for linking two coaxial links and one fiber link.
• Use it for converting between a fiber-optic cable and a coaxial cable.
This card does not connect the BCU to the LAN. You must provide a sep-
arate ARCNET single fiber-optic interface card or an ARCNET single
coaxial interface card for this purpose. The BCU merely supplies the hub
card with power. For a list of the ARCNET single input interface cards
currently supported by Trane, see Figure 73 on page 161.

Note:
Do not use tee connectors on any type of hub card. The coaxial
cable is connected directly to the BNC connector on the hub
card.

ARCNET One Coaxial/Two Fiber-Optic Hub Card


You can use this multi-purpose ARCNET hub card for these purposes:
• Use it as a hub for linking two fiber-optic links and one coaxial link.
• Use it for converting between a fiber-optic cable and a coaxial cable.
This card does not connect the BCU to the LAN. You must provide a sep-
arate ARCNET single fiber-optic input interface card or an ARCNET sin-
gle coaxial input interface card for this purpose. The BCU merely
supplies the hub card with power. For a list of the ARCNET single input
interface cards supported by Trane, refer to Figure 73 on page 161.

Note:
Do not use tee connectors on any type of hub card. The coaxial
cable is connected directly to the BNC connector on the hub
card.

Configuring an ARCNET Card


The following sections provide information about ARCNET card jumper
settings and DIP switch settings.

ARCNET Card Jumper Settings


When configuring an ARCNET card for use in a BCU, the I/O range is
always set to start at 02E0 and the IRQ is set to 2/9. See Figure 73 on
page 161 for setting jumpers for these configurations. When the card is
used in a PC, an alternate I/O range and an alternate IRQ may need to be
selected.

BMTW-SVN01F-EN 159
Chapter 6 Network Wiring

Note:
1. The ARCNET interface card you have may not be shown in
the Figure 73 on page 161. However, the card is still func-
tional provided it is used on the same PC that the card was
originally installed in. Refer to the literature originally
shipped with the card for its jumper settings. Note that
ARCNET PCX-CXB cards do not work in Pentium class
PCs. ARCNET PCX20-CXB cards or newer should be used
with Pentium processors class PCs.
2. Only Trane-provided ISA ARCNET cards may be used in
the BCU because the BCU does not have a PCI bus.

160 BMTW-SVN01F-EN
ARCNET Communication

Figure 73. Tracer Summit ARCNET Cards—Version 4 or Later

Description Jumper Settings

Trane Part # 4020 1016


ARCNET three input coaxial
hub
Trane Part # 4020 1017
ARCNET two coaxial/one
fiber-optic hub
Trane Part # 4020 1018
ARCNET one coaxial/two
fiber-optic hub

Jumper Settings
E1—
Time out = Normal

Trane Part # 4020 1021


ARCNET single coaxial input
(main)
Trane Part # 4020 1110
ARCNET single fiber-optic
input (main)

Jumper Settings
E1—
IRQ = 2/9
E2—
I/O base = 02E0

SW1 DIP Switch Settings


See Table 32 on page 162 for
ARCNET address settings.

BMTW-SVN01F-EN 161
Chapter 6 Network Wiring

ARCNET Card DIP Switch Settings


The single input coaxial and fiber-optic ARCNET cards have DIP
switches (SW1) that give them a unique ARCNET address. Trane recom-
mends that the ARCNET address setting match the BCU device ID set-
ting.
ARCNET card address DIP switch settings are defined in Table 32.

Table 32. Single Input ARCNET Card Address DIP Switch Settings (for
Trane P/N 4020 1021 and 4020 1110)

Address SW1 DIP Switch Number

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

01 OFF on on on on on on on
02 on OFF on on on on on on
03 OFF OFF on on on on on on
04 on on OFF on on on on on
05 OFF on OFF on on on on on
06 on OFF OFF on on on on on
07 OFF OFF OFF on on on on on
08 on on on OFF on on on on
09 OFF on on OFF on on on on
10 on OFF on OFF on on on on
11 OFF OFF on OFF on on on on
12 on on OFF OFF on on on on
13 OFF on OFF OFF on on on on
14 on OFF OFF OFF on on on on
15 OFF OFF OFF OFF on on on on
16 on on on on OFF on on on
Note:
Cards are marked
• This table defines the first 16 addresses. There is a total of 255 possible addresses.
Recommended BCU ARCNET addresses are 1 through 79. Recommended worksta-
with PCX20-CXB
tion ARCNET addresses are 80 through 255.
• Cycle system power to reset the ARCNET configuration.

162 BMTW-SVN01F-EN
Installing Coaxial Cable Connectors

Installing an ARCNET Card


The installation procedure for installing the ARCNET card into a BCU
panel applies to all of the cards discussed. For information on installing
an ARCNET card in a PC, refer to the PC manufacturer’s literature.

nCAUTION
Hazardous Voltage!
Turn off power at the BCU before installing the ARCNET card. Failure to
turn off power before servicing may result in human injury or damage
to equipment.

To install an ARCNET card into a BCU panel:


1. Choose one of the card slots in the BCU’s ISA bus.
2. Remove the screw from the card mounting bracket on the BCU.
3. Insert the ARCNET card into the slot.
4. Secure the card in place with the mounting screw.

Installing Coaxial Cable Connectors


Note:
RG-62 cables typically use two-piece connectors (as shown in
the following figures). RG-58 cables use three-piece connectors.

1. Cut off any excess cable, leaving two extra feet.


2. Push the small end of the crimp ferrule (see Figure 74) onto the end of
the cable.

Figure 74. Crimp Ferrule

3. Using the coaxial cable stripper, remove 1/2 inch of the outer jacket
from the end of the cable as shown in Figure 75.

BMTW-SVN01F-EN 163
Chapter 6 Network Wiring

Figure 75. Removing Braid Shield From Cable

4. Fan the coaxial braid slightly and fold it back over the outer jacket as
shown in Figure 76.

Figure 76. Fanning Back the Coaxial Braid

5. Using the coaxial cable stripper, remove 7/16 inch of the center con-
ductor shield from the end of the cable as shown in Figure 77. If a
small plastic cord is present, remove it using a knife or small wire
cutter.

Figure 77. Removing Center Conductor Shield

6. Push the BNC connector body onto the cable.


7. Fan the braid around the connector body, and slide the crimp ferrule
over the braid and onto the connector as shown in Figure 78.

Figure 78. Installing Connector Body Assembly to Cable

8. With the proper crimping tool, crimp the ferrule onto the braid and
connector body.

164 BMTW-SVN01F-EN
Installing Coaxial Cable Connectors

9. Crimp the small end of the ferrule onto the cable. An example of a
completed coaxial cable termination is shown in Figure 79.

Note:
Different ferrules are required for the following:
• Plenum RG-62
• Non-plenum RG-62
• Plenum RG-58
• Non-plenum RG-58

Figure 79. Completed Coaxial Cable Termination

10. With an ohmmeter, make sure that the center conductor to BCU
chassis ground is greater than 2 MΩ (megohms). If it is less than
2 MΩ, determine the reason before continuing.
11. With an ohmmeter, make sure that the ferrule to BCU chassis ground
is greater than 2 MΩ. If it is less than 2 MΩ, determine the reason
before continuing.
12. With an ohmmeter, make sure that the center conductor to ferrule
connection reads greater than 2 MΩ.
• For ARCNET LAN: If the ohmmeter reads 93–105 Ω, the other
end has a tee and is terminated.
• For Ethernet LAN: If the ohmmeter reads 50–55 Ω, the other end
has a tee and is terminated.
• If the ohmmeter reads 2 Ω, make sure the other end is not con-
nected.
• If the ohmmeter reads 0 Ω, there is a mistake in the preceding
steps. Review these steps to determine the error.
13. To aid in terminating the other end of this cable, take the tee and ter-
minator shipped with this BCU and put them on this end of the cable.
Then, put the metal BNC, tee, and terminator in insulation to isolate
it from the BNC chassis ground.
14. Repeat this procedure for all other cables in this BCU.

BMTW-SVN01F-EN 165
Chapter 6 Network Wiring

IP Installation Procedures
Before attempting to install Tracer Summit on an owner’s shared IP net-
work, review BAS-PRB004-EN, Tracer Summit BACnet/IP Network
Installations, for background information. Then follow the procedures in
this section for IP installation.
Tracer Summit also has an IP Validation utility and instructions for its
use located in its software. Access this utility by choosing Programs, then
Tracer Summit, then Advanced, and then IP Validation.

Note:
BCUs (BMTS) cannot operate on an IP network, so in this sec-
tion all references to BCU refer to the BCU (BMTW).

Preinstallation
Some planning is required before installing Tracer Summit on a shared
IP network. The owner’s IS staff who control the network will be able to
provide most of the information that you will need to proceed. Follow
these steps:
1. Meet with the owner’s IS staff. Discuss where BCUs and PC Worksta-
tions will be located. They will need to provide you with the following
for each BCU:
• Permanent IP address
• Subnet mask
• The UDP port (we prefer to use port 47808, but any other port is
acceptable)
• The IP address of the IP gateway/router
• Jacks and cabling for connection to their network
2. Request that the IS staff configure TCP/IP on each PC Workstation to
be used for Tracer Summit. The configuration can be whatever is pre-
ferred by the IS staff.
3. Determine if Tracer Summit will be set up as one site or as multiple
sites on the network. If it is a simple installation within one building,
then it will typically be a single site. If, however, the installation will
cover multiple buildings on one shared network, then each building
should be set up in Tracer Summit as a separate site. This will make
programming, operation, and troubleshooting of the system much
easier.
4. Determine if a BACnet/IP router is required. This is typically used to
connect BCUs (BMTS) or other non-IP BACnet devices to an IP net-
work.
5. Create your submittal and riser diagrams showing BCUs and PC
Workstations connected to the owner’s network.

166 BMTW-SVN01F-EN
IP Installation Procedures

Programming the Site


Tracer Summit sites on shared networks are programmed just like any
other site. However, there is some special setup information that must be
configured so that communications can occur between different portions
of the network. Follow these steps:
1. Use Tracer Summit to define the site in the Site Configuration editor.
2. From the Communications tab of the Site Configuration editor select
Configure.
3. In the Site Connection Wizard select BACnet/IP.
4. If there is a BCU on the local subnet, select Use local connection. If
not, select Use BBMD.

Note:
A BACnet broadcast management device (BBMD) is used to
facilitate low-level communications. On most sites, the BCU
will serve as a BBMD. However, it is possible for another BAC-
net device, such as a BACnet/IP router, to fill this function.

5. If you have chosen Use BBMD, enter the IP address of the BCU that
you will connect through.
6. Shut down Tracer Summit.
7. Start the Tracer Summit IP Validation utility. Access this utility by
choosing Programs, then Tracer Summit, then Advanced, and then IP
Validation.
8. Click on the Import button on the toolbar. This will allow you to read
the desired site into the utility.
9. Double-click on BACnet Network to select it. From the combo box,
change Network Type from Non-IP to IP.
10. For each BCU that will be on the IP network, click on the BCU’s
name in the tree view to select it and enter the IP configuration infor-
mation provided by the owner’s IS staff.
11. When all of the information is entered, select Validate from the Edit
menu or click the Validate button on the toolbar. This will automati-
cally assign one BCU on each subnet as a BBMD and create new sub-
nets as required.
12. Save the setup information by selecting Save from the File menu or
clicking on the Save button.
13. Create BCU labels by selecting Create Label File from the File menu
or clicking on the Labels button. These labels contain all of the BCU
IP configuration information and can be printed from any word pro-
cessing program.

BMTW-SVN01F-EN 167
Chapter 6 Network Wiring

BCU (BMTW) Setup


BCUs (BMTW) can be used on either dedicated or shared networks. The
following configuration must occur before a BCU can communicate on an
IP network. Follow these steps:
1. Be sure that the BCU has an Ethernet card installed and is powered
up.
2. Connect a UPCM edit cable (P/N 3591 4260) with the appropriate
adapter (9-pin adapter: P/N 3591 4262 or 25-pin adapter: P/N 3591
4263) between the serial port on your laptop and the mini-monitor
port on the BCU.
3. From the IP Validation utility, open the file you created in “Program-
ming the Site” on page 167. Expand the tree view and click on the
BCU that is connected.
4. Select Configure BCU from the Edit menu or click the BCU Configu-
ration button.
5. Click the Download button.
6. Enter the Serial Port number that you are using to download the
information to the BCU in the BCU Connection dialog.
7. Click the Connect button to download the configuration.
8. Place the IP configuration label, printed in step 13 of “Programming
the Site” on page 167, inside the BCU for future reference.
9. Repeat this process for each BCU on the network.

System Checkout
Before attempting to download code and database information to BCUs,
you should verify that you have network and BACnet communications in
place. Communication problems can be mechanical or related to the net-
work or to software. These steps will help you determine if communica-
tion is working properly.
1. From a PC Workstation that is currently connected to the network,
start the IP Validation utility, and open the site file you created in
“Programming the Site” on page 167.
2. From the Edit menu select “Check BCU Comms” or click the BCU
Comms button on the toolbar.

168 BMTW-SVN01F-EN
IP Installation Procedures

3. Click the Ping button. If the BCU is setup properly for IP communica-
tions and the owner’s IP network is up, Ping will show how long it
took to communicate to the BCU from your workstation. A successful
test will provide a response in well under 1000 ms.

Note:
If this test fails, verify that the BCU is powered and connected
to the network. If so, ask the owner’s IS staff to verify the
connection.
4. If step 3 works properly, click the Who is button. This will send a
short BACnet message to the BCU. If this message comes back prop-
erly (with a response time well under 1000 ms), then you have proven
BACnet communications capabilities.

Note:
If this test fails (indicated by I Am Failed messages), first check
to see if the BCU has code in it. If it does not, you will see a
blinking letter C on the seven-segment LED display (see
Figure 69 on page 150 for the location of the LED).
If the BCU has code, then verify the BCU setup, including
addresses and all setup information. Typically, a failure results
from improper BBMD assignments. If BCU/BBMD setup
checks out, then ask the owner’s IS staff to verify the BACnet/
IP router’s ability to pass UDP on the designated port.

Setting Up the Broadcast Distribution Table


In order for communications to work across IP subnets, a table listing the
location of each BBMD in a site will need to be downloaded to each BBMD
in that site. This table is called a broadcast distribution table (BDT). This
table is automatically created by the IP Validation utility; however, it has
to be manually downloaded. To download the BDT, follow these steps:
1. From a PC Workstation that is connected to the network, start the IP
Validation utility by choosing Programs, then Tracer Summit, then
Advanced, and then IP Validation utility.
2. Open the site file you created in “Programming the Site” on page 167.
3. Select Configure BBMDs from the File menu or click the BDT Editor
button.
4. Verify that all of the BBMDs for the site are listed on the table by
clicking the BDT Editor’s Validate button. Refer to the online docu-
mentation if there is a discrepancy (BDT Mismatch) in the table.
5. Select Download. The table should be sent to all BBMDs. If the down-
load is not successful, an error will appear.
6. Exit the IP Validation utility by selecting Exit from the File menu.
7. Start Tracer Summit. The BCUs should receive their code and data-
bases, and communications should proceed the same as for a dedi-
cated network.

BMTW-SVN01F-EN 169
Chapter 6 Network Wiring

Special Situations
There are several special situations that require additional configuration.
These are highlighted below.

Multiple Sites on a Single Shared Network


On a larger installation, many buildings may exist on a shared network.
In this case, you will typically program each building as its own site. This
can be easily accommodated. Follow these rules:
• Each BCU and PC Workstation on a site will require a unique device
ID. However, the device IDs may be re-used on other sites on the IP
network.
• Each BBMD in a site will require a copy of the BDT for the site. The
site BDT lists only the BBMDs for that site.
• In the rare instance of having more than one site on an IP subnet(s),
each site should use a unique UDP port number.
• Sites will send alarms into the PC Workstation’s event log regardless
of whether they are open or not.
• Selecting a site from the tree will automatically select and open that
site.

BACnet/IP Routers
Installations with BCUs (BMTS) or other BACnet devices that are not IP
capable will require the installation of a BACnet/IP router. Contact Trane
for more information on these routers. Follow these rules regarding
routers:
• The BACnet devices on each side of the BACnet/IP router (the dedi-
cated-network side and the shared-network side) require unique
BACnet network numbers. Additionally, all dedicated-network
BACnet devices must have the same BACnet network number and all
shared-network BACnet devices must have the same BACnet net-
work number. These numbers can be set up in site configuration.
• The router(s) will require IP configuration.

170 BMTW-SVN01F-EN
EIA-232 Communication

Connecting a Service Laptop Computer to an IP Network


In order to connect to an IP network, the laptop computer needs the
proper IP setup information. This information can vary depending on
where you connect on the network. This can be a particular challenge for
laptop computers that are used as service tools. Guidelines are as follows:
• The owner’s IS staff can provide details for how to connect to different
locations on the network. You may need to change the IP setup infor-
mation as you move around the building. There are special utilities
available to help manage this process. Contact Trane for details.
• You may wish to carry a small Ethernet hub. This will allow you to
connect to the network by temporarily installing the hub between the
network jack and the BCU.

EIA-232 Communication
Use EIA-232 communication for interfacing to non-Trane automation sys-
tems using the BACnet standard protocol. Serial connection for EIA-232
communication is via an EIA-232 communication card installed in one of
the three slots in the BCU’s ISA bus. For the location of the option card
slots, refer to Figure 2 on page 4.
When using EIA-232 communication, an ARCNET or Ethernet card is not
required, but is necessary for connection of the PC Workstation for pro-
gramming and setup.
For more information on BACnet, implementation of the protocol, and
BACnet-compatible vendors, contact Trane.

Note:
You cannot install an EIA-232 communication card and an
internal modem card in the same Tracer Summit BCU.

Installing an EIA-232 Card


The EIA-232 communication card jumper and connector locations are
illustrated in Figure 80 on page 172.

BMTW-SVN01F-EN 171
Chapter 6 Network Wiring

Figure 80. EIA-232 Interface Card with Jumper and Connector


Locations
DB-9
9-pin serial port
connector
Ribbon cable

JP1 Comm B
Comm port jumpers connector to DB-9

JP2 DB-25
IRQ jumpers 25-pin serial port
connector

nCAUTION
Hazardous Voltage!
Turn off power at the BCU before installing the EIA-232 card. Failure to
turn off power before servicing may result in human injury or damage
to equipment.

To install the EIA-232 card in the BCU:


1. Choose one of the interface card slots in the BCU’s ISA bus.
2. Remove the screw from the card mounting bracket on the BCU.
3. Insert the EIA-232 card into the slot.
4. Replace the mounting screw and tighten to secure the EIA-232 card
in place.

172 BMTW-SVN01F-EN
EIA-232 Communication

Configuring a BACnet-Compatible Device


A BACnet-compatible device that communicates using an EIA-232 con-
nection with the BCU must meet the following parameters:
• Communication at 9,600 baud
• 8 data bits, 1 stop bit, no parity
• Cable connection to the DB-9 or DB-25 connector on the EIA-232
interface card in the BCU

Specifications for EIA-232 Cable Connections


Table 33 provides specifications for the EIA-232 cable used to connect the
BCU to a BACnet-compatible device.

Table 33: EIA-232 cable specifications

Specification Description

Length 50 feet (15.24 meters) maximum

For longer distances use a short haul modem.

Shield Shield the cable to comply with FCC regulations and


to protect the BCU from electrical noise.

DB-9 Pin Assignments


Figure 81 provides the DB-9 pin assignments for a BACnet device and a
Tracer Summit BCU.

Figure 81: DB-9 connector cable pin connections

Tracer Summit BCU

EIA-232 card with 9-pin


BACnet device male connector

Receive data pin assignment (input) Pin 3 = Transmit data (output)

Transmit data pin assignment (output) Pin 2 = Receive data (input)

Signal ground pin assignment Pin 5 = Signal ground

Pin 1 = DCD
Jumpered
Pin 7 = RTS

Com = 1

IRQ = 4

BMTW-SVN01F-EN 173
Chapter 6 Network Wiring

DB-25 Connector Pin Assignments


Figure 82 provides the DB-25 pin assignments for a BACnet device and a
Tracer Summit BCU.

Figure 82: DB-25 connector cable pin connections

Tracer Summit BCU

BACnet device EIA-232 card with 25-pin


male connector

Receive data pin assignment (input) Pin 2 = Transmit data (output)

Transmit data pin assignment (output) Pin 3 = Receive data (input)

Signal ground pin assignment Pin 7 = Signal ground

Pin 4 = RTS
Jumpered
Pin 8 = DCD

174 BMTW-SVN01F-EN
Chapter 7

BCU Modem Installation

The Tracer Summit BCU supports modem communication with a remote


PC Workstation. Communication is performed using the BACnet point-
to-point protocol at a maximum communication rate of 9,600 baud.
For remote communication capabilities, install a single internal modem
in one of the BCU option card slots (see Figure 2 on page 4).

Note:
Because modem specifications are subject to change, Trane sup-
ports only those modems specified by Trane. This ensures
proper operation and facilitates technical support if communi-
cation failures occur.
You cannot install an internal modem card and an EIA-232
communication card in the same BCU.

Note:
See “EIA-232 Communication” on page 171 for international
use with an EIA-232 card and code-compliant external
modems.

Modem Card Configuration


Modems that are factory-installed in the BCU have jumpers preconfig-
ured for operation with Tracer Summit. You must configure accessory
modems purchased from Trane prior to installation in the BCU. Inspect
the modem card to make sure the settings are correct.

Jumper Settings
Before installing the internal modem, inspect all jumper blocks for the
appropriate settings. Jumper block locations and the recommended
jumper settings for modems specified by Trane are illustrated in
Figure 83 on page 176.

BMTW-SVN01F-EN 175
Chapter 7 BCU Modem Installation

Figure 83. Internal Modem Jumper Settings for Trane Part Number
4020 1020

{
{

Figure Note:
Trane part number 4020 1020 is the U.S. Robotics Sportster “Plug and Play” 56K
data/fax internal modem.

Modem Function Settings


A modem installed in a BCU must first be configured through Tracer
Summit in order for it to answer incoming calls and to dial out alarms, if
set up for remote event routing. Some modems may include DIP switches
for configuring the modem functions; however, those settings are nor-
mally overridden through software configuration. Trane-supplied
modems are all set through software. Table 34 on page 177 provides a list
of the modem function settings configured through Tracer Summit when
a modem object is programmed for a BCU.

176 BMTW-SVN01F-EN
Modem Card Configuration

Table 34. BCU Modem Function Settings

BCU Function
Settings

Data Terminal Ready (DTR) Override


OFF OFF Normal DTR operations: BCU must provide DTR signal for modem to accept com-
mands; dropping DTR terminates a call.
ON Modem ignores DTR (Override).
Verbal/Numeric Result Codes
OFF OFF Verbal (word) results
ON Numeric results
Result Code Display
ON OFF Results suppressed
ON Results enabled
Command Mode Local Echo Suppression
OFF OFF Keyboard commands displayed
ON Echo suppressed
Auto Answer Suppression
ON OFF Modem answers on first ring, or higher if specified in NVRAM
ON Auto answer disabled
Carrier Detect (CD) Override
OFF OFF Modem sends CD signal when it connects with another modem, drops CD on dis-
connect.
ON CD always ON (Override)
Power-on and ATZ Reset Software Defaults
ON OFF Load Y or Y1 configuration from user-defined nonvolatile memory (NVRAM)
ON Load &FO-Generic template from read only memory (ROM)
AT Command Set Recognition
ON OFF Command recognition disabled (Dumb Mode)
ON Recognition enabled (Smart Mode)

BMTW-SVN01F-EN 177
Chapter 7 BCU Modem Installation

Installing a Modem Card


The general procedure for installing the internal modem card in the BCU
is provided below. For detailed information, consult the modem manufac-
turer’s literature.

nCAUTION
Hazardous Voltage!
Turn off power at the BCU before installing the modem card. Failure to
turn off power before servicing may result in human injury or damage
to equipment.

To install a modem card:


1. Choose one of the option card slots at the bottom of the BCU.
2. Remove the mounting screw from the protective plate that covers the
option card slot.
3. Remove the cover plate from the option card slot.
4. Verify that the jumper settings are correct.
5. Insert the modem card in the selected card slot. Make sure that the
gold leads on the edge of the modem card are seated firmly in the card
slot.
6. Secure the modem card’s mounting bracket with the mounting screw
removed in step 2.

178 BMTW-SVN01F-EN
Chapter 8

Installing Tracer Summit

If you are installing Tracer Summit Critical Control System software for
FDA compliant facilities, see Appendix C, “Tracer Summit Critical Con-
trol System”.
You must have Microsoft Internet Explorer Version 5 or higher on your
PC before you can install the Tracer Summit application.

IMPORTANT
Before installing Tracer Summit software, you must disable any anti-
virus software and shutdown any firewall software running on your PC.

Refer to the following sections to install Tracer Summit on the various


Windows operating systems:
• Windows XP, see “Installing Tracer Summit using Windows XP or
Windows 2000” on page 180.
• Windows 2000, see “Installing Tracer Summit using Windows XP or
Windows 2000” on page 180
• Windows 98, see “Installing Tracer Summit using Windows 98” on
page 182.
• Windows ME, see “Installing Tracer Summit using Windows ME” on
page 188.
• Windows NT, see “Installing Tracer Summit using Windows NT” on
page 191.
• Windows 95 is no longer supported.
• If necessary, configure the BCU for BACnet/IP communications (see
“Configuring BCUs for BACnet/IP Communications” on page 194).
• To uninstall Tracer Summit, see “Uninstalling Tracer Summit” on
page 193.

BMTW-SVN01F-EN 179
Chapter 8 Installing Tracer Summit

Installing Tracer Summit using


Windows XP or Windows 2000
You must have Internet Explorer Version 5 or higher installed on your
PC before installing Tracer Summit.
To install the Tracer Summit software:
1. Close all applications and toolbars. To verify that all tasks are closed,
press Ctrl-Alt-Delete and end all the tasks except for Explorer.
2. Insert the Tracer Summit for Windows CD in the CD-ROM drive of
your PC. Tracer Summit automatically displays the Tracer Summit
Installation screen (see Figure 84).

Figure 84. Tracer Summit Installation Screen

3. Click on the Tracer Summit Setup Program button.


4. Follow the online instructions to install the application. The installa-
tion process takes 5 to 10 minutes, depending on the speed of the PC
and the amount of available memory.

Setting UP Network Adapters


Use the following instructions to set up network adapters for either
Ethernet or ARCNET.
To set up an Ethernet adapter using plug and play installation:
Follow the manufacturer’s plug and play instructions for an Ethernet
LAN adapter. When installation is complete, install the network adapter
protocol, and then verify the adapter status.
To install a PCI, PCMCIA, or ISA ARCNET card:
1. Install the ARCNET card:
• For PCI ARCNET cards, shut down the PC Workstation and
install the PCI20 ARCNET card in an available PCI slot. Insert
the Tracer Summit software CD in the CD-ROM drive of your
computer. Then, restart the computer. Follow steps 2–4.

180 BMTW-SVN01F-EN
Installing Tracer Summit using Windows XP or Windows 2000

• For PCMCIA ARCNET cards, insert the card with Windows XP or


Windows 2000 running. Follow steps 2–4.
2. Windows XP or Windows 2000 Plug and Play software will detect the
card and initiate the new hardware installation wizard.
3. When prompted to specify a location for the card driver, specify
E:\ARC_XP. (“E” represents the drive letter for the CD-ROM drive,
which may be different on your PC.)
4. Restart the PC if prompted.

Note:
The ISA ARCNET card is not supported by Windows XP or
Windows 2000.

Installing the Network Adapter Protocol


The network adapter protocol is the language the computer uses to com-
municate over the network. How you install the network adapter protocol
depends on the operating system and the adapter type.
• For Windows XP or Windows 2000 systems using Ethernet or ARC-
NET adapters on a dedicated network, Tracer Summit automatically
installs support. It is only necessary to verify the adapter settings
(see “Verifying Network Adapter Status and Protocol for Windows XP
or Windows 2000” on page 182).
• For Windows XP or Windows 2000 systems using Ethernet adapters
on a shared network, you may need to install TCP/IP protocol (see
“Installing TCP/IP Protocol for BACnet/IP Communications on
Shared Ethernet Networks” below).

Installing TCP/IP Protocol for BACnet/IP


Communications on Shared Ethernet Networks
Before installing TCP/IP, check the network settings for the adapter to
verify that TCP/IP is not already installed on the PC Workstation. Many
PC Workstations supplied by a customer already have TCP/IP protocols
installed on the machines and automatically bind this protocol to an
adapter when you install the adapter on the PC Workstation.
To install TCP/IP protocol on Windows XP or Windows 2000:
1. From the Windows Start menu, select Settings. Then, select Control
Panel.
2. Double-click the Network and Dial-up Connections icon.
3. For each adapter, double-click the connection name that corresponds
to the Ethernet adapter.
4. In the adapter Properties dialog box, click on the Install button, select
the protocol, then click the Add button. The Select Network Protocol
dialog box displays.

BMTW-SVN01F-EN 181
Chapter 8 Installing Tracer Summit

5. In the Select Network Protocol dialog box, click on the Internet Proto-
col (TCP/IP).
6. Click the OK button.
7. Enter the required IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway
information. (This information can be obtained from the customer’s
Information Systems group.)
8. Click the OK button.
9. Restart the computer.

Verifying Network Adapter Status and Protocol


for Windows XP or Windows 2000
1. From the Windows Start menu, select Settings. Then, select Control
Panel.
2. Double-click the Network and Dial-up Connections icon.
3. For each adapter double-click the connection name that corresponds
to the Ethernet or ARCNET adapter. Verify the adapter settings:
• For dedicated Ethernet and ARCNET, Tracer Summit automati-
cally installs support. Verify that the adapter is not bound to any
other protocols.
• For Ethernet adapters on a shared network, verify that the TCP/
IP protocol is installed. Information Systems personnel who are
in charge of the workstation should verify any other protocols
selected.
4. Click the OK button. If you made any changes, you will need to
restart the PC when prompted.

Note:
After you have set up the network adapter, you need to verify
the adapter status to make sure there are no conflicts with
other IRQ or I/O addresses. Windows XP or Windows 2000 sys-
tems automatically check for resource conflicts when you are
installing new adapters.

Installing Tracer Summit using


Windows 98
You must have Internet Explorer Version 5 or higher installed on your
PC before installing Tracer Summit.
To install the Tracer Summit software:
1. Close all applications and toolbars. To verify that all tasks are closed,
press Ctrl-Alt-Delete and end all the tasks except for Explorer.

182 BMTW-SVN01F-EN
Installing Tracer Summit using Windows 98

2. Insert the Tracer Summit for Windows CD in the CD-ROM drive of


your PC. Tracer Summit automatically displays the Tracer Summit
Installation screen (see Figure 85).

Figure 85. Tracer Summit Installation Screen

3. Click Tracer Summit Setup Program button.


4. Follow the online instructions to install the application. The installa-
tion process takes 5 to 10 minutes, depending on the speed of the PC
and the amount of available memory.

Setting UP Network Adapters


Use the following instructions to set up network adapters for either
Ethernet or ARCNET.
To set up an Ethernet adapter using plug and play installation:
Follow the manufacturer’s plug and play instructions for an Ethernet
LAN adapter. When installation is complete, install the network adapter
protocol, and then verify the adapter status.
To install a PCI, PCMCIA, or ISA ARCNET card:
1. Install the ARCNET card:
• For PCI ARCNET cards, shut down the PC Workstation and
install the PCI ARCNET card in an available PCI slot. Insert the
Tracer Summit software CD in the CD-ROM drive of your com-
puter. Then, restart the computer. Follow steps 2–4.
• For PCMCIA ARCNET cards, the drivers are installed when you
do a custom setup of Tracer Summit (see “Custom Setup” on
page 186). Remove all cards from the laptop sockets prior to the
final step for installing Tracer Summit software.
• For ISA ARCNET cards, the drivers are installed when you do a
custom setup of Tracer Summit (see “Custom Setup” on
page 186).
2. Windows 98 Plug and Play software will detect the card and initiate
the new hardware installation wizard.

BMTW-SVN01F-EN 183
Chapter 8 Installing Tracer Summit

3. When prompted to specify a location for the card driver, specify


E:\ARCNET. (“E” represents the drive letter for the CD-ROM drive,
which may be different on your PC.)
4. Restart your PC if prompted.

Installing the Network Adapter Protocol

IMPORTANT
The network adapter card must be installed before installing the net-
work adapter protocol.

The network adapter protocol is the language the computer uses to com-
municate over the network. How you install the network adapter protocol
depends on the operating system and the adapter type.
• For Windows 98 systems using Ethernet adapters on a dedicated net-
work, Tracer Summit automatically installs support. It is only neces-
sary to verify the adapter settings (see “Verifying Network Adapter
Status and Protocol for Windows 98” on page 185).
• For Windows 98 systems using Ethernet adapters on a shared net-
work, you may need to install TCP/IP protocol (see “Installing TCP/IP
Protocol for BACnet/IP Communications on Shared Ethernet Net-
works” on page 181).
• For ARCNET, the network protocol is installed as a part of the Cus-
tom Setup (see “Custom Setup” on page 186).

Installing TCP/IP Protocol for BACnet/IP


Communications on Shared Ethernet Networks
Before installing TCP/IP, check the network settings for the adapter to
verify that TCP/IP is not already installed on the PC Workstation. Many
PC Workstations supplied by a customer already have TCP/IP protocols
installed on the machines and automatically bind this protocol to an
adapter when you install the adapter on the PC Workstation.
To install TCP/IP Protocol on Windows 98:
1. From the Windows desktop, right-click on the Network Neighborhood
icon, and select properties.
2. Click the Configuration tab. Then, click the Add button. The PC may
display one or more progress bars titled “Building Driver Information
Database.” The Select Network Protocol dialog box displays.
3. In the Select Network Component Type dialog, click on Protocol.
Then, click the Add button.
4. In the Select Network Protocol dialog box, click on Microsoft in the
manufacturers’ window.
5. Click TCP/IP in the Network Protocols window.
6. Click the OK button.

184 BMTW-SVN01F-EN
Installing Tracer Summit using Windows 98

7. Enter the required IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway


information. (This information can be obtained from the customer’s
Information Systems group.)
8. In the Network dialog window, click OK. You will need to have your
Windows 98 installation CD available for Windows to copy files.
9. Restart your computer.

Verifying Network Adapter Status and Protocol for


Windows 98
1. From the Windows Start menu, select Settings. Then, select Control
Panel.
2. Double-click the Network icon.
3. For each adapter click the adapter name, click the Properties button,
then click the Bindings tab. Verify the adapter settings:
• For dedicated Ethernet and ARCNET, Tracer Summit automati-
cally installs support. Verify that the adapter is not bound to any
other protocols.
• For Ethernet adapters on a shared network, verify that the TCP/
IP protocol is installed. Information Systems personnel who are
in charge of the workstation should verify any other protocols
selected.
4. Click the OK button. If you made any changes, you will need to
restart the PC when prompted.

Verifying Adapter Status for Resource Conflicts for


Windows 98
After you have set up the network adapter, you need to verify the adapter
status to make sure there are no conflicts with other IRQ or I/O
addresses.
1. Right-click the My Computer icon on the desktop to display a pop-up
menu.
2. From the pop-up menu, select Properties to display the System Prop-
erties dialog box.
3. Click the Device Manager tab:
• Verify that the network adapter listed is the adapter you
installed.
• If the Network Adapter node is expanded and “!” displays on the
adapter, there is a problem with the adapter. This is typically
caused by an IRQ conflict.
• If the Network Adapter node is not expanded, there should be no
problem with the adapter.

BMTW-SVN01F-EN 185
Chapter 8 Installing Tracer Summit

Determining Available IRQ and I/O Addresses for the


ISA and PCMCIA ARCNET Adapters
In some instances, you need to determine the available interrupt request
(IRQ) and input/output (I/O) addresses for your computer. You need this
information to install the ISA and PCMCIA Adapters for Tracer Summit
communication.
To determine the addresses:
1. From the Windows Start menu, select settings. Then, select Control
Panel.
2. Double-click the System icon.
3. From the System Properties dialog box, click the Device Manager tab.
4. Select the Computer icon.
5. Click the Properties button. The Computer Properties dialog box dis-
plays with IRQ settings listed. Use the scroll bar to view the IRQs
that are in use. Available I/Os do not display in the list.
6. Click the I/O button. Use the scroll bar to view the I/O addresses that
are in use. Available I/Os do not display in the list.
7. Write down the available IRQ and I/O addresses to be used for the
network adapter.

Custom Setup
Using the Custom Setup option, you can select the Tracer Summit appli-
cation files you want to load. Custom setup is necessary in certain situa-
tions, such as when using a ISA or PCMCIA ARCNET card. You can also
use the Custom Setup option to choose not to install some of Tracer Sum-
mit’s components (such as the graphics library). This is useful when you
are trying to minimize the amount of disk space required for Tracer Sum-
mit.
To use the Custom Setup option:
1. Close all applications and toolbars. To verify that all tasks are closed,
press Ctrl-Alt-Delete and end all the tasks except for Explorer.
2. Insert the Tracer Summit for Windows CD in the CD-ROM drive of
your PC. Tracer Summit automatically displays the Tracer Summit
Installation screen (see Figure 85 on page 183).
3. From the Tracer Summit Installation screen, click the Tracer Summit
Setup Program (see Figure 86 on page 187).

186 BMTW-SVN01F-EN
Installing Tracer Summit using Windows 98

Figure 86. Tracer Summit Setup Type Window

4. Click the Custom option. Then, click the Next button to continue with
the Custom setup steps.
5. At the Custom Setup window (see Figure 87), select the features that
you want to install.

Figure 87. Custom Setup Window

BMTW-SVN01F-EN 187
Chapter 8 Installing Tracer Summit

The icons in front of the features indicate whether that feature will be
installed. Click on the icon to display a pop-up menu with these
choices:

This feature will be installed.

This feature and all of its subfeatures will be installed.

This feature will not be installed.

6. Click the Next button to continue with the Custom setup steps.

Installing Tracer Summit using


Windows ME
You must have Internet Explorer Version 5 or higher installed on your
PC before installing Tracer Summit.
To install the Tracer Summit software:
1. Close all applications and toolbars. To verify that all tasks are closed,
press Ctrl-Alt-Delete and end all the tasks except for Explorer.
2. Insert the Tracer Summit for Windows CD in the CD-ROM drive of
your PC. Tracer Summit automatically displays the Tracer Summit
Installation screen (see Figure 88).

Figure 88. Tracer Summit Installation Screen

3. Click on the Tracer Summit Setup Program button.

188 BMTW-SVN01F-EN
Installing Tracer Summit using Windows ME

4. Follow the online instructions to install the application. The installa-


tion process takes 5 to 10 minutes, depending on the speed of the PC
and the amount of available memory.

Setting up Network Adapters


Use the following instructions to set up network adapters for Ethernet
To set up an Ethernet adapter using plug and play installation:
Follow the manufacturer’s plug and play instructions for an Ethernet
LAN adapter. When installation is complete, install the network adapter
protocol, and then verify the adapter status.

Installing the Network Adapter Protocol

IMPORTANT
The network adapter card must be installed before installing the net-
work adapter protocol.

The network adapter protocol is the language the computer uses to com-
municate over the network. How you install the network adapter protocol
depends on the operating system and the adapter type.
• For Windows ME systems using Ethernet adapters on a dedicated
network, Tracer Summit automatically installs support.
• For Windows ME systems using Ethernet adapters on a shared net-
work, you may need to install TCP/IP protocol (see “Installing TCP/IP
Protocol for BACnet/IP Communications on Shared Ethernet Net-
works” below).
• ARCNET for Windows ME is not supported. ARCNET is only sup-
ported for Windows XP, Windows 2000, and Windows 98.

Installing TCP/IP Protocol for BACnet/IP


Communications on Shared Ethernet Networks
Before installing TCP/IP, check the network settings for the adapter to
verify that TCP/IP is not already installed on the PC Workstation. Many
PC Workstations supplied by a customer already have TCP/IP protocols
installed on the machines and automatically bind this protocol to an
adapter when you install the adapter on the PC Workstation.
To install TCP/IP Protocol on Windows ME:
1. From the Windows desktop, right-click on the Network Neighborhood
icon, and select Properties.
2. Click the Configuration tab. Then, click the Add button. The PC may
display one or more progress bars titled “Building Driver Information
Database.” The Select Network Protocol dialog box displays.

BMTW-SVN01F-EN 189
Chapter 8 Installing Tracer Summit

3. In the Select Network Component Type dialog, click on Protocol.


Then, click the Add button.
4. In the Select Network Protocol dialog box, click on Microsoft in the
manufactures’ window.
5. Click TCP/IP in the Network Protocols window.
6. Click the OK button.
7. Enter the required IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway
information. (This information can be obtained from the customer’s
Information Systems group.)
8. In the Network dialog window, click the OK button. You will need to
have your Windows ME installation CD available for Windows to
copy files from.
9. Restart your computer.

Verifying Network Adapter Status and Protocol


for Windows ME
1. From the Windows Start menu, select Settings. Then, select Control
Panel.
2. Double-click the Network icon.
3. For each adapter click the adapter name, click the Properties button,
and then click the Bindings tab. Verify the adapter settings:
• For dedicated Ethernet Tracer Summit automatically installs
support. It is only necessary to verify that the adapter is not
bound to any other protocols.
• For Ethernet adapters on a shared network, verify that the TCP/
IP protocol is installed. Information Systems personnel who are
in charge of the workstation should verify any other protocols
selected.
4. Click the OK button. If you made any changes, You will need to
restart the PC when prompted.

Note:
After you have set up the network adapter, you need to verify
the adapter status to make sure there are not conflicts with
other IRQ or I/O addresses. Windows ME systems automati-
cally check for resource conflicts when you are installing new
adapters.

190 BMTW-SVN01F-EN
Installing Tracer Summit using Windows NT

Installing Tracer Summit using


Windows NT
You must have Internet Explorer Version 5 or higher installed on your
PC before installing Tracer Summit.
To install the Tracer Summit software:
1. Close all applications and toolbars. To verify that all tasks are closed,
press Ctrl-Alt-Delete and end all the tasks except for Explorer.
2. Insert the Tracer Summit for Windows CD in the CD-ROM drive of
your PC. Tracer Summit automatically displays the Tracer Summit
Installation screen (see Figure 89).

Figure 89. Tracer Summit Installation Screen

3. Click on the Tracer Summit Setup Program button.


4. Follow the online instructions to install the application. The installa-
tion process takes 5 to 10 minutes, depending on the speed of the PC
and the amount of available memory.

Setting UP Network Adapters


Follow the manufacturer’s instructions for installing an Ethernet LAN
adapter. When installation is complete, install the network adapter pro-
tocol, and then verify the adapter status.

Installing the Network Adapter Protocol

IMPORTANT
The network adapter card must be installed before installing the net-
work adapter protocol.

The network adapter protocol is the language the computer uses to com-
municate over the network. How you install the network adapter protocol

BMTW-SVN01F-EN 191
Chapter 8 Installing Tracer Summit

depends on the operating system and the adapter type. Verify the adapter
settings:
• For Windows NT systems using Ethernet adapters on a dedicated
network, Tracer Summit automatically installs support.
• For Windows NT systems using Ethernet adapters on a shared net-
work, may need the TCP/IP protocol installed, (see “Installing TCP/IP
Protocol for BACnet/IP Communications on Shared Ethernet Net-
works” below).
• ARCNET for Windows NT is not supported. ARCNET is only sup-
ported for Windows XP, Windows 2000, and Windows 98.

Installing TCP/IP Protocol for BACnet/IP


Communications on Shared Ethernet Networks
Before installing TCP/IP, check the network settings for the adapter to
verify that TCP/IP is not already installed on the PC Workstation. Many
PC Workstations supplied by a customer already have TCP/IP protocols
installed on the machines and automatically bind this protocol to an
adapter when you install the adapter on the PC Workstation.
To install TCP/IP Protocol on Windows NT:
1. From the Windows Start menu, select Settings. Then select Control
Panel.
2. Double-click the Network icon.
3. Click the Protocols tab. Then, click the Add button.
4. In the Select Network Protocol dialog box, select TCP/IP Protocol.
Then, click the OK button.
5. Type the IP Address, subnet mask, and default gateway for the net-
work card. (This information should be provided by the Information
Systems personnel who are in charge of the workstation.)
6. Click the OK button.
7. Restart your computer.
8. Restart your computer.
9. Click the OK button. If you made any changes, You will need to
restart the PC when prompted.

Verifying Network Adapter Status and Protocol


for Windows NT
1. From the Windows Start menu, select Settings. Then, select Control
Panel.
2. Double-click the Network icon.

192 BMTW-SVN01F-EN
Uninstalling Tracer Summit

3. For each adapter click the adapter name, click the Properties button,
then click the Bindings tab. Verify the adapter settings:
• For dedicated Ethernet, Tracer Summit automatically installs
support. Verify that the adapter is not bound to any other proto-
cols.
• For Ethernet adapters on a shared network, verify that the TCP/
IP protocol is installed. Information Systems personnel who are
in charge of the workstation should verify any other protocols
selected.
4. Click the OK button. If you made any changes, You will need to
restart the PC when prompted.

Note:
After you have set up the network adapter, you need to verify
the adapter status to make sure there are not conflicts with
other IRQ or I/O addresses. Windows NT systems automati-
cally check for resource conflicts when you are installing new
adapters.

Uninstalling Tracer Summit


1. Close all applications and any active background programs on the
toolbar, such as virus protection software.
2. From the Windows Start menu, select Settings, then select Control
Panel.
3. From the Control Panel, select Add/Remove Programs.
4. From the list of software programs, select Tracer Summit.
5. Click the Add/Remove button (or for Windows XP or Windows 2000,
click the Remove button). The Tracer Summit Program Maintenance
window displays.
6. Click Remove.
7. Click the Next button.
After Tracer Summit software is removed from the hard drive, the
InstallShield Wizard Completed screen appears.
8. Click Finish.

Note:
The Tracer Summit uninstall procedure does not remove the
Tracer Summit directory structure. You must delete the Tracer
Summit directory manually.

BMTW-SVN01F-EN 193
Chapter 8 Installing Tracer Summit

Configuring BCUs for BACnet/IP


Communications
When Tracer Summit is installed, the utilities necessary for BACnet/IP
communications configuration are automatically installed on the PC
Workstation.
To access the BACnet/IP utilities and online documentation:
1. From the Windows Start menu, select Programs, then select Tracer
Summit.
2. Select Advanced to display the menu selections IP Validation (the IP
tools) and BACnet IP Utilities Online Documentation.
The online documentation describes the operation of the IP tools and
explains exactly how to configure your BCU for communication on shared
IP Ethernet networks.

Note:
For detailed instructions on installing and configuring BACnet/
IP Tracer Summit for Windows sites, refer to Tracer Summit
BACnet/IP Network Installations, BAS-PRB004-EN.

Starting Tracer Summit


1. Double-click the Tracer Summit icon on the desktop to display the
Log On dialog box.
2. Type the following in the User Name field:
tracer

3. Press Tab.
4. Type the following in the Password field:
summit

5. Press Enter. Tracer Summit displays the main window.


You can now begin to use the application.

194 BMTW-SVN01F-EN
Chapter 9

Installing the Daily


Operations Tutorial

To use the Tracer Summit Focus on Your System Daily Operations Tuto-
rial, you must first run the tutorial installation program on your PC.
After you have installed the program, tutorial buttons appear on the fol-
lowing Tracer Summit components:
• Schedule window
• Overrides dialog box
• Event Log window
• Chiller Plant Status window
• Reports dialog box
• Backup dialog box
• Restore Site dialog box
The tutorial buttons provide links from the Tracer Summit software to
the training modules on the tutorial CD-ROM. For basic operation of the
tutorial, see the Daily Operations guide.
To install the Daily Operations Tutorial on your PC:
1. Close all programs.
2. Insert the Daily Operations Tutorial CD into the CD-ROM drive of
your PC.
After a moment, the Welcome dialog box is automatically displayed.
3. Click the Next button to continue. The Tracer Summit Tutorial Soft-
ware License Agreement dialog box is displayed.
4. Read the license agreement and click Yes to accept the terms. The
Microsoft Data Access installation program is initiated, and the
Microsoft Data Access 2.1 dialog box is displayed.
5. Click Yes to accept the terms of the Microsoft Data Access license
agreement. The Microsoft Data Access 2.1 Setup dialog box is dis-
played.

BMTW-SVN01F-EN 195
Chapter 9 Installing the Daily Operations Tutorial

6. Click Continue. The setup program searches for installed data access
components and then displays a setup dialog box (see Figure 90).

Figure 90. Microsoft Data Access 2.1 Setup Dialog Box

Computer icon
button

7. Click the computer icon button to continue the installation process. A


final setup dialog box is displayed, confirming that you have success-
fully installed the Microsoft Data Access components (see Figure 91).

Figure 91. Microsoft Data Access 2.1 Setup Dialog Box

8. Select an option:
• If your PC does not have Tracer Summit Version 11.0 or higher
software installed, follow steps 9 to 11 to complete installation of
the tutorial program.
• If your PC has Tracer Summit Version 11.0 or higher software
installed, follow steps 12 and 13.
If your PC does not have Tracer Summit V11.0 or higher
installed:
9. Click OK. The Microsoft Data Access 2.1 Restart Windows dialog box
is displayed.

196 BMTW-SVN01F-EN
Installing the Daily Operations Tutorial

10. Click the Restart Windows button to restart the Windows operating
system. When Windows restarts, a Tracer Summit Tutorial icon is
automatically placed on your Windows desktop (see Figure 92 on
page 197).

Figure 92. Tracer Summit Tutorial Icon

11. To access the tutorial outside of Tracer Summit, double-click the tuto-
rial icon button.
If your PC has Tracer Summit V11.0 or higher installed:
12. Click OK to dismiss the setup dialog box. You have now installed the
Daily Operations Tutorial on your PC. A Tracer Summit Tutorial icon
is automatically placed on your Windows desktop (see Figure 92).
13. To access the tutorial outside of Tracer Summit, double-click the tuto-
rial icon.

BMTW-SVN01F-EN 197
Chapter 9 Installing the Daily Operations Tutorial

198 BMTW-SVN01F-EN
Chapter 10

BCU Operation and


Communication Status

Light emitting diodes (LEDs) on the BCU indicate both operation status
of the BCU and communication status with UCMs. Operation status of
the BCU is indicated by a seven-segment LED display located at U11 on
the BCU logic board. Communication status with UCMs is indicated by a
row of green, yellow, and red LEDs, identified by designators beginning
with CR. These LEDs are located to the left of the TB2 terminal block on
the BCU logic board. See Figure 93 on page 200 for locations of both types
of LEDs.
The information provided by the LEDs is explained in the following
sections:
• “LED Indicators for BCU Communication Status” on page 200
• “LED Codes for BCU Operation Status” on page 201

BMTW-SVN01F-EN 199
Chapter 10 BCU Operation and Communication Status

Figure 93. BCU Logic Board LED Locations

LED Indicators for BCU Communication


Status
A row of green, yellow, and red LEDs, identified by numbers beginning
with CR and located to the left of the T2 terminal block on the BCU logic
board (see Figure 93), indicates the status of communication between the
BCU and UCMs. CR28 through CR31 pertain to only Comm5 communica-
tion.

200 BMTW-SVN01F-EN
LED Codes for BCU Operation Status

The meaning of each LED code is explained in Table 35 on page 201.

Table 35. LED Codes for UCM-Communication-Link Status

Link Number LED Meaning

1 CR14 (green) Flashes during transmission of data.


CR15 (yellow) Flashes during reception of data.
CR28 (red) Service mode for a Comm5 card. Flashes during reset and when the Service
Pin button on the Comm5 card is pressed.
2 CR16 (green) Flashes during transmission of data.
CR17 (yellow) Flashes during reception of data.
CR29 (red) Service mode for a Comm5 card. Flashes during reset and when the Service
Pin button on the Comm5 card is pressed.
3 CR18 (green) Flashes during transmission of data.
CR19 (yellow) Flashes during reception of data.
CR30 (red) Service mode for a Comm5 card. Flashes during reset and when the Service
Pin button on the Comm5 card is pressed.
4 CR20 (green) Flashes during transmission of data.
CR21 (yellow) Flashes during reception of data.
CR31 (red) Service mode for a Comm5 card. Flashes during reset and when the Service
Pin button on the Comm5 card is pressed.
Mini-monitor CR24 (green) Flashes during transmission of data.
EIA-232 port CR25 (yellow) Flashes during reception of data.

LED Codes for BCU Operation Status


During BCU startup and reset operations, a sequence of codes appears on
the seven-segment LED display. A complete listing of codes and their
meaning appears in Table 36 on page 202.
A decimal point appears on the seven-segment LED display at U11 when
the processor is busy (see Figure 93 on page 200 for location of LED dis-
play). The decimal point disappears when the processor is idle. During
normal operation, the decimal point will flicker, with occasional longer
flashes. If the decimal point appears continuously for more than a second
or two at a time, it may indicate that the BCU is overloaded.
During normal operation, the BCU will also show a repeating “dancing
dash” pattern on the display: bottom segment, middle segment, top seg-
ment, middle segment.
Standard sequences of the seven-segment LED display that appear dur-
ing startup and reset operations are described in “Startup Sequence Pro-
cedures” on page 203 and “BCU Reset Procedures” on page 203.

BMTW-SVN01F-EN 201
Chapter 10 BCU Operation and Communication Status

Table 36: BCU Operation Status LED Codes

Code Meaning
— “Dancing dash”: normal operation with program (data-


base). (Dashes flash in succession, one at a time.)
8 Processor in reset, or no functioning software. This code
will remain present if the standard capacity module is not
inserted or has totally failed.
7 Testing boot loader.
6 Testing main code.
5 Detecting 50/60 Hz power line frequency.
4 Testing RAM.
3 Initializing RAM.
2 Partitioning RAM.
1 Initializing optional hardware.
0 RAM intact after power fail. Returning to interrupted pro-
gram.
-C No code, or code is corrupt. Waiting for PC Workstation to
send code.
Cd Code being downloaded.
E Erasing RAM. Turn power off within 10 seconds to avoid
erasing code.
EC Erasing main code. Waiting for PC Workstation to send
code.
F Error during normal operation. Cycle power to restore nor-
mal operation.
-H Code download complete, but DIP switches are all on. Turn
off power to the BCU and set the switches to the desired
device ID.
H Power fail interrupt completed. This will appear briefly
when power is turned off. It may persist if there is a sus-
tained brownout below proper operating voltage.
J Restart due to BACnet or mini-monitor command. This
should be shown for only a second or two before a reset
sequence begins.
-P No program (database). Waiting for PC Workstation to send
program.
Pd Program (database) being downloaded.
L Boot loader not found. Service required.
F0 Error in logic board hardware. Service required.
F1 Error in standard capacity module. Service required.
F2 Error in high capacity module. Service required.
F12 Error programming standard capacity module. Service
required.
Note:
All codes with more than one character will be displayed sequentially one character
at a time. For example, F12 will be displayed as an F, then a 1, then a 2. The display
will repeat that error code until the problem is corrected or the BCU is powered off/
on.

202 BMTW-SVN01F-EN
LED Codes for BCU Operation Status

Startup Sequence Procedures

New BCU
This startup sequence is for BCUs that have not been programmed. Ser-
vice may be required if a sequence occurs other than as described. Con-
tact your local Trane representative.
8, 7, 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1, –C, Cd
When the download of code is complete, if the BCU DIP switches are all
turned on, the BCU will display –H. In this case, turn off power to the
BCU and set the switches to the desired device ID, as described in
“BACnet—Device IDs” on page 149.
When the download of code is complete, if the BCU DIP switches are set
to a valid device ID, the BCU will reset itself in order to verify the down-
loaded code. During this operation, the BCU will display the following
sequence:
8, 7, 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1, –P, Pd, “dancing dash”

Programmed BCU
This startup sequence is for BCUs that were programmed previously.
Service may be required if a sequence occurs other than as described.
Contact your local Trane representative.
8, 7, 6, 5, 0, “dancing dash”

BCU Reset Procedures


If the seven-segment LED display sequence does not follow the startup
sequence, it may indicate a failure of the BCU. Depending on the failure
mode and the status displayed in the seven-segment LED display, you
may need to reset the BCU. Refer to Table 36 on page 202 for LED codes.
There are four levels of reset for the BCU (listed in order of least to most
impact on the BCU):
1. Reset
2. Clear BCU RAM and Reset
3. Clear Database, RAM, and Reset
4. Clear Code, Database, RAM, and Reset
Except for the power off/on reset, the other reset procedures are typically
done by selecting BCU Reset/Restore from the Tools menu in Tracer Sum-
mit. All of the “Clear . . . Reset” procedures can also be done at the BCU
as described in the following subsections.

Note:
See Appendix B for BCU (BMTS) reset procedures.

Reset
On the BCU, toggle the power at switch S1 off and then back on.

BMTW-SVN01F-EN 203
Chapter 10 BCU Operation and Communication Status

Clear BCU RAM and Reset


The BCU normally preserves the content of RAM through power failure.
RAM contains the current status of all BCU object trend data, events,
and alarms. In most cases, this is desirable. However, there are circum-
stances in which you may need to clear RAM. This is normally done from
the PC Workstation, as described in the System Programming guide.
RAM can also be cleared at the BCU as follows:
1. Turn off power to the BCU.
2. Set all DIP switches to on.
3. Turn on power.
4. The LED display should show 8, then E, and then E with the decimal
point flashing.

CAUTION
If you wait longer than 10 seconds, the BCU code and database may be
cleared as well as its RAM.

5. As soon as the LED display shows E with the decimal point flashing,
turn off power.
6. Set the DIP switch to its proper position.
7. Turn on power. The LED display should show the following sequence:
8, 7, 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1, “dancing dash”

Clear Database, RAM, and Reset


Database contains the user programmed data, which consists of all BCU
objects, such as areas, VAVs, I/O, UCMs, trends, CPL, etc. See the defini-
tion of RAM in “Clear BCU RAM and Reset”.”
In most cases, you will perform this operation from the PC Workstation,
as described in the System Programming guide. However, this can also be
done at the BCU as follows:
1. Change the DIP switch S2 position 8 to Off.

Note:
When the BCU has code and detects a change in DIP switches
at S2, the BCU clears the current database and looks for a PC
Workstation from which to download a database that matches
the new device ID (corresponding to the settings at DIP switch
S2).

2. The LED display will show the following sequence:


J, 8, 7, 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1, –, P
3. Change DIP switch S2 position 8 back to on.
4. The LED display will show the following sequence:
J, 8, 7, 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1, –, P

204 BMTW-SVN01F-EN
LED Codes for BCU Operation Status

5. The BCU will request a download of the database. When completed,


the LED will return to the “dancing dash” sequence.

Clear Code, Database, RAM, and Reset


Code consists of the BCU image software, which is similar to the BIOS in
a PC. See definitions of RAM in “Clear BCU RAM and Reset”” and of
database in “Clear Database, RAM, and Reset” on page 204.
In most cases, you will force a BCU to accept new code from the PC Work-
station, as described in the System Programming guide. However, this
can also be done at the BCU as follows:

Note:
You must have a PC Workstation connected, and that worksta-
tion must contain the appropriate version of BCU code.

1. Turn off power to the BCU.


2. Set all DIP switches to on.
3. Turn on power. The LED should display the following sequence:
8, E, E (with decimal point flashing for about 10 seconds),
7, 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1, -C, Cd, –H, “dancing dash”

4. Turn off power and reset the DIP switches.


5. Turn on power and observe the second display sequence described in
“Startup Sequence Procedures” on page 203.

BMTW-SVN01F-EN 205
Chapter 10 BCU Operation and Communication Status

206 BMTW-SVN01F-EN
Chapter 11

Troubleshooting

This troubleshooting procedure will attempt to provide general checks


and troubleshooting procedures to resolve most common problems associ-
ated with a Tracer Summit BCU. Troubleshooting can generally be
divided into the following categories:
• BCU does not respond
• BCU locks up
• BCU does not communicate via modem
• BCU does not communicate with UCMs
• BCU panel mismatch error indicated by active panel checking

BCU Does Not Respond


This is a general problem that can be caused by a broad range of factors.
Use the following checklist for troubleshooting for this problem:
1. Verify that the BCU has the correct ac supply voltage.
2. Check for the proper device address on the BCU logic board.
3. Check for the proper address on the ARCNET card (if applicable).
4. Check that the BCU power switch is turned on.
5. Verify that the BCU LEDs sequence properly on power up. (See
Chapter 10, “BCU Operation and Communication Status.”)
6. Verify that the ARCNET card or Ethernet card LEDs show normal
activity, indicated by the green LED remaining steadily lit and the
yellow LED flashing.
7. Check the ARCNET or Ethernet cable connections. Check that the
correct cable type is being used. Verify that ARCNET tees and termi-
nators are good.
8. Perform a Clear Code, Database, RAM, and Reset using the BCU DIP
switches. Then repeat steps 5 and 6. See Chapter 8 for details.

Note:
See Appendix B for details for the BCU (BMTS).

9. If the above steps do not resolve the problem, contact a qualified


Trane service technician for service.

BMTW-SVN01F-EN 207
Chapter 11 Troubleshooting

BCU Locks Up
This is a more specific symptom of a BCU that is not responding. In this
situation the BCU works most of the time but periodically locks ups and
stops responding. The following list describes situations that could cause
this problem and suggests solutions:
• A building power disturbance, such as that caused by electrical
storms, may affect BCU power in such a way that the BCU locks up.
Cycling power again on the BCU will normally clear this up. Repeat
occurrences of this type of problem would warrant installation of an
external device that protects against ac-power transients.
• If the BCU has a modem installed, a power disturbance can enter
through the modem line. Cycling BCU power will normally resolve
this problem. Repeat occurrences of this type of problem warrant
installation of an in-line, modem-line transient protection device.
• Strong EMI/RFI interference can lock up a BCU. Avoid using cell
phones and walkie-talkies within 6 ft of a BCU (unless the cell phone
is being used as a modem connection device for accessing the BCU).
• Programming the BCU (from a Tracer Summit PC Workstation) with
too many UCM and program objects can overload a BCU so that, dur-
ing periods of high activity, the BCU is not able to complete all tasks
and goes into a “Watch Dog Timeout” sequence. To avoid this prob-
lem, make sure to estimate the BCU memory usage with the BCU siz-
ing spreadsheet before connecting UCMs and programming the BCU.
As a rule of thumb, leave at least 15% memory headroom.
• BCUs that are programmed to route alarms/events to remote Tracer
Summit PC Workstations will lock up over time if the remote work-
station is not available to receive dialed out alarms or is not con-
nected periodically to harvest the alarms. Generally, this problem is
most prevalent when the BCU has been programmed to route alarms/
events to multiple remote PC Workstations that are not available to
receive or harvest the alarms frequently enough.
• Defective ARCNET, Ethernet, hub cards, and modems can cause the
BCU to lock up.

BCU Does Not Communicate Via


Modem
BCU modem communication problems fall into two general categories:
• Problems with the modem and phone line
• Problems with the BCU programming setup

208 BMTW-SVN01F-EN
BCU Does Not Communicate with UCMs

Problems with the Modem and Phone Line


The following presents guidance in proper modem configuration and
phone line connection:
• The BCU uses an ISA bus-style modem. BAS recommends that you
use only modems supplied by Trane for use in the BCU. The modem
must be hardware configured for Comm1 and IRQ4.
• You cannot use an EIA-232 card and modem card at the same time in
a BCU, even though you may have an open card slot available in
which to insert them.
• The modem phone line must be connected to the line connection port
on the modem rather than the telephone connection port.
• Connect a phone to the line, check for a dial tone, and verify that the
phone can make and receive calls.
• An in-line transient protection device may be needed on the phone
line to prevent transient electrical signals from affecting the modem.

Problems with the BCU Modem Programming Setup


Follow these guidelines for proper modem programming setup:
• The modem will not work at all until the BCU has been programmed
to have a modem object. Verify that the BCU has a modem object.
• If the phone line goes through a local phone system within the build-
ing, additional wait times and access numbers may need to be pro-
grammed into the phone numbers being used for dial out and remote
access.
• Verify that the correct phone number is being used when attempting
to dial into a BCU.

BCU Does Not Communicate with


UCMs
UCM communication problems can generally be divided into two main
groups:
• Communication failures on initial installation
• Communication failures that occur after initial installation

Communication Failures on Initial Installation


Failures that occur during the initial installation can generally be traced
to:
• Wiring errors, i.e., wrong polarity, shorts between conductors, open
wires, bad high-resistance connections, use of wire with too high
capacitance, too long total communication-link length (high resis-
tance), wrong connections at the BCU or UCM, etc.
• Communication failures caused by nearby strong sources of
EMI/RFI interference

BMTW-SVN01F-EN 209
Chapter 11 Troubleshooting

• Incorrect UCM addresses


• Incompatible hardware or software versions of the UCM and/or of
Tracer Summit
• Wrong or defective UCM communication card at the BCU
• BCU site configuration not programmed correctly

Communication Failures that Occur After Initial


Installation
Failures that occur after successful communication following initial
installation can generally be traced to:
• Wiring problems, i.e., shorts or opens that develop from wire that is
damaged from either being pulled too tightly across sharp objects or
from building vibration
• Communication failures caused by nearby strong sources of
EMI/RFI interference that have been added since original wiring
installation
• UCM addresses reset incorrectly after UCMs have been serviced or
replaced
• AC-power disturbances (lightning, welding, etc.) that enter the UCM
communication link wiring and are strong enough to damage the
UCM communication card and/or connected UCMs
• Failures of a UCM communication card and/or BCU logic board
• Programming changes at the Tracer Summit PC Workstation that
alter the site configurations or UCM objects

BCU Panel Mismatch Error


The panel mismatch error is a result of active panel checking. Active
panel checking is a process by which the PC Workstation reads the type
of BCU that is connected for a given address. If the BCU hardware does
not match the BCU as defined in the Site Configuration editor, active
panel checking will discover the error. The Panel Mismatch error mes-
sage (Figure 94 on page 211) will explain the mismatch, and the Site Con-
figuration editor will be launched to allow you to resolve the error.

210 BMTW-SVN01F-EN
BCU Panel Mismatch Error

Figure 94. BCU Panel Mismatch Error Message

BCUs are described in a slightly different manner in the Panel Mismatch


error message and the Site Configuration editor. Table 37 shows how the
Panel Mismatch error message and the Site Configuration editor present
the three types of BCUs.

Table 37: BCU Descriptions

Panel Mismatch Error Message Site Configuration Editor

Modular BCU (BMTW), M1 Modular BCU (BMTW) with


Capacity: 1
Modular BCU (BMTW), M2 Modular BCU (BMTW) with
Capacity: 2
Tracer Summit BCU BCU (BMTS)

Possible solutions to the error are as follows:


1. If you have multiple BCUs on site, verify that the device ID of the
panel you are attempting to download matches the Site Configuration
address for that panel.
2. Check to see if the panel type in the Site Configuration editor
matches the panel that appears in the Panel Mismatch error mes-
sage. If it does not, change the definition of the panel type in the Site
Configuration editor.
3. If the Site Configuration setup for the panel matches the BCU hard-
ware, but you still get a panel mismatch error, then a hardware fail-
ure is possible. For example, if the hardware is a Modular BCU
(BMTW) with both standard capacity and high capacity cards
inserted, and Site Configuration is defined as Modular BCU (BMTW),
Capacity:2, and active panel checking sees a Modular BCU (BMTW),
M1, it is possible that the high capacity card is either (a) not seated

BMTW-SVN01F-EN 211
Chapter 11 Troubleshooting

properly in the slot or (b) is defective. The solution is to properly seat


or change the failed hardware.

212 BMTW-SVN01F-EN
Glossary

A ARCNET
A local area network (LAN) architecture developed by Datapoint Corp.
ARCNET uses a logical token-passing access method that is valid for use
with Tracer Summit BACnet protocol.

B BACnet
See Building automation control network.

BCU
See Building control unit.

binary output (BOP)


An on/off control output from the processor. An optional BCU I/O module
adds this function.

BOP
See Binary output.

building automation control network (BACnet)


An interoperable protocol developed specifically for the building controls
industry by ASHRAE. The American National Standards Institute
named it as a standard. The BACnet protocol is best suited for system
level control devices.

building control unit (BCU)


A Tracer Summit system intelligent field panel that communicates with
multiple Trane UCMs.

C CCP
Central control panel.

CSC
Commercial self-contained.

communication link
A set of wires connected from one device to another that is used to trans-
mit information between the devices. This link is typically a twisted pair
of wires for Trane building management systems.

BMTW-SVN01F-EN 213
Glossary

configuration
The physical and logical elements of an information processing system,
the manner in which they are organized, or both. May refer to hardware
or software.

D DAC
LonMark™ Discharge Air Controller profile.

device ID
A software address assigned to Tracer Summit BCUs and PC Worksta-
tions when a site is first created. The device ID then becomes the
“address” for that device and allows Tracer Summit software to success-
fully route messages and alarms to the device. Syn: instance, instance #,
device instance, ID.

DIP switch
A dual inline package (DIP) switch is a set of individual switches pack-
aged in a single assembly. The most common type has eight individual
switches. Each switch can be toggled to be open or closed. For a BCU to
communicate with a device, the DIP switch package of each UCM must be
set to a unique address. The address is derived from the positions of the
switches in the package.

E EIA-232
Interface standard used for communications between peripheral devices
and energy management systems. (Formerly known as RS-232.)

EMI/RFI
Electromagnetic interference/radio-frequency interference.

Ethernet
A local area network (LAN) architecture developed by Xerox Corporation
that uses a baseband architecture common to modern LANs, including
building automation systems. Ethernet handles about 10,000,000 b/s and
can be used with almost any kind of computer. It is valid for use with
Tracer Summit BACnet protocol.

G GLD
Generic LonTalk® device.

H HVAC
Heating, ventilating, and air conditioning.

214 BMTW-SVN01F-EN
Glossary

I Internet Protocol (IP)


The protocol within TCP/IP that governs the transmission of data. It has
been adopted by ASHRAE as a means to communicate BACnet over a
network. It allows BACnet to pass through IP devices, such as IP system
routers and over the Internet.

I/O
Input/output.

IRQ
Interrupt request.

L LAN
See Local area network.

LED
See Light emitting diode.

light emitting diode (LED)


A semiconductor diode that emits light when a voltage is applied to it.
Used in an electronic display, such as on a BCU, for diagnostic purposes.

LCP
Lighting control panel.

local area network (LAN)


A communications network linking multiple nodes.

LonTalk®
An interoperable protocol developed by the Echelon Corporation and
named as a standard by the Electronics Industries Alliance (EIA-709.1).
It is packaged on a Neuron chip.

M modem
A device used to interface the components of a building management sys-
tem or a terminal with a telephone line. A modem translates information
from the building management panel into signals that can be transmitted
over the telephone or other data communication circuits.

µs
Microsecond.

ms
Millisecond.

BMTW-SVN01F-EN 215
Glossary

N NMR
Nuclear magnetic resonance.

P PC Workstation
Tracer Summit personal computer workstation.

pF
Picofarads.

PCM
Programmable control module.

S SCC
LonMark™ Space Comfort Controller profile.

softset
Use of software to assign an address to a device instead of a DIP switch.

standard network variable type (SNVT)


Used to define data objects in the LonTalk® protocol. The SNVTs are
organized into LonMark™ functional profiles for specific applications. The
acronym is pronounced snivit.

T TCM
Thermostat control module.

TRS
Tracer remote station.

TUC
Terminal unit controller.

topology
The physical arrangement of cables connecting BCUs, PC Workstations,
and hubs within a network. Types of topologies used for Tracer Summit
include bus, star, and bus/star.

U UCM
See Unit control module.

UCP
Unit control panel.

216 BMTW-SVN01F-EN
Glossary

UIP
See Universal input.

unit control module (UCM)


A factory-mounted, microelectronic circuit board that interfaces with a
BCU to provide control and monitoring of HVAC equipment.

universal input (UIP)


An input point that can be configured (typically via jumpers) to take
either analog or binary inputs. An optional BCU I/O module adds five
universal inputs to the BCU.

UPCM
Universal programmable control module.

V VAV
Variable air volume.

BMTW-SVN01F-EN 217
Glossary

218 BMTW-SVN01F-EN
Appendix A

Setting DIP Switch


Addresses

A dual inline package (DIP) switch is a set of individual switches pack-


aged in a single assembly. The most common type has eight individual
switches. Each switch can be toggled to be open or closed. For a BCU to
communicate with a device, the DIP switch package of each UCM must be
set to a unique address. The address is derived from the positions of the
switches in the package.
A switch is either open or closed. Each switch position relates to a specific
numeric value or to a value of zero depending upon whether it is open or
closed. Most switch packages indicate open using the designation off or
open and indicate closed using the designation on or closed.
Calculate the address by adding the numeric values for each switch posi-
tion. When the switch is in its active position, use the numeric value; if
the switch is not in its active position, use the value zero. In some cases,
however, you must add the calculated number to a base number other
than zero to determine the actual address. Use Table A1 to locate these
numeric values and base numbers.
Unfortunately, there is no common method used to set these switches. In
some cases the position labeled 1 is the first position. In other cases the
position labeled 8 or 5 is the first position. In some cases the active state
of the switch is off, while in other cases the active state is on. It all
depends on the particular type of UCM that is being addressed. See
Figure 95.

BMTW-SVN01F-EN 219
Appendix A Setting DIP Switch Addresses

Figure 95. Various Types of DIP Switch Packages

Using Table 38, you can calculate any address by knowing each position
value and whether on or off is the active state.
For example, use Table 38 to determine the address of a variable air vol-
ume (VAV) UCM version 3.2 controller with the DIP switch set as shown
in Figure 96 on page 220.

Figure 96. Calculating DIP Switch Settings

VAV/UCM DIP Switch Package

Address = 1st value + 2nd value +3rd value + 4th value + 5th value + 6th value + 7th
value + 8th value + base value
= 1 + 0 + 4 + 0 + 16 + 32 + 0 + 0 + 64
= 1 + 4 + 16 + 32 + 64
= 53 + 64
= 117

220 BMTW-SVN01F-EN
Setting DIP Switch Addresses

Table 38. DIP Switch Settings for UCMs Supported by Tracer Summit

Active Switch Value at Label #:


Device Type Active Range Base
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Tracer Summit
BCU ID OFF 1–79 0 1 2 4 8 16 32 64 128
BCU ARCNET OFF 1–79 0 1 2 4 8 16 32 64 128
Workstation OFF 80–225 0 1 2 4 8 16 32 64 128
ARCNET
CSC on 1–31 0 16 8 4 2 1
LCP on 82–126 0 1 2 4 8 16 32 64 128
LCP Supervisor on 0–81 0 1 2 4 8 16 32 64 128
PCM OFF 1–30 0 1 2 4 8 16 32 OFF OFF
CGA-CGW on 33–63 32 16 8 4 2 1
TCM OFF 1–20 0 1 2 4 8 16 32 con- con-
figure figure
TRS open 0–15 0 1 2 3 8 not con- not not
used figure used used
TUC on 33–96 0 128 64 32 16 8 4 2 1
UCP1 OFF 1–3 0 on on on 2 1
Universal PCM on 32—100 0 1 2 4 8 16 32 64 OFF
VAV I OFF 1–63 0 1 2 4 8 16 32
VAV II/III/IV OFF 65–127 64 1 2 4 8 16 32
VAV wireless OFF 1–31 0 1 2 4 8 16 on on con-
receiver figure
Van Trac II CCP-S2
Voyager
Central Control Panel (CCP)
VAV II/III/IV OFF 1–16 0 1 2 4 8 16 32
Voyager Micro on 31 0 con- on on on on on
Rooftop figure

BMTW-SVN01F-EN 221
Appendix A Setting DIP Switch Addresses

222 BMTW-SVN01F-EN
Appendix B

BCU (BMTS)

This appendix provides information about hardware installation and


troubleshooting for the BCU (BMTS). The following topics are covered for
the BMTS model only:
• BCU component descriptions and layout diagrams
• UCM communication card installation
• Communication-link field wiring for the BCU
• A startup and troubleshooting sequence for the BCU

BCU (BMTS) Components


The BCU is a NEMA-1 rated enclosure that houses a single processor/
memory card with a terminator block (TB1). The BCU contains three
UCM communication cards slots and three slots for option cards supplied
by Trane, such as Ethernet cards, ARCNET cards, modem cards, or EIA-
232 communication cards for BACnet interface. These components are
shown in Figure 97 on page 224.

BMTW-SVN01F-EN 223
Appendix B BCU (BMTS)

Figure 97. Tracer Summit BCU Component Layout

The BCU (BMTS) can also house an optional 24 Vdc power supply (Trane
part number 4020 0792), which is used for powering analog devices that
require 24 Vdc at 120 mA maximum power supply. These analog devices
include 4–20 mA or 0–10 Vdc humidity, pressure, and temperature sen-
sors. An optional 24 Vac 40 VA transformer (Trane part number
3580 6009) is required to provide ac power to the 24 Vdc power supply.
The locations of both the Trane 24 Vdc power supply and the Trane
24 Vac 40 VA transformer are shown in Figure 98 on page 225. The
transformer is mounted inside the power section of the BCU.

224 BMTW-SVN01F-EN
BCU (BMTS) Components

Figure 98. Optional Power Supply Location and Wiring

240 HOT
120/240 HOT 240 VAC POWER SOURCE
120 NEU 120 VAC POWER SOURCE
Ground GREEN LED FLASHES DURING
NORMAL OPERATION

RED LED FLASHES FOR ALARM

120 VAC SERVICE


RECEPTACLE

TB6
+ 1
24 VDC + 2
_ 3
24 VDC _
4
WHITE
OPTIONAL 24 VDC
BLACK POWER SUPPLY (120 MA)

ORANGE 4 AMP MAX

BCU LOGIC BOARD OPTIONAL


P1 POWER SUPPLY
P2
P3 P4 ON 1
P5 P6 S1
OFF 0
S2
ON
P7 TB1
12345678
P8 UNIVERSAL INPUT 1
P9
LED CR16 UNIVERSAL INPUT 2
UCM
LED CR17
COMMUNICATION
TX UNIT CONTROLLER
CARD LINK 1 RX COMMUNICATIONS
SLOTS TX LINK 1 (MODULE P7)
SHIELD
LINK 2
RX UNIT CONTROLLER
COMMUNICATIONS
TX LINK 2 (MODULE P8) AVAILABLE ON
LINK 3 RX TRIPLE UCM
TX SHIELD COMM. CARD
RS-232 RX UNIT CONTROLLER VERSIONS ONLY
COMMUNICATIONS
LINK 3 (MODULE P9)
SHIELD

ARCNET CONNECTION VIA EITHER AN RG-62,


93 OHM COAXIAL CABLE WITH BNC CONNECTOR
OPTION AND TERMINATOR OR A 62.5/125 FIBER OPTIC
CABLE WITH ST TYPE CONNECTORS
CARD
SLOTS RS-232 CONNECTION VIA DB-25 CONNECTOR
REMOTE COMMUNICATION VIA A TRANE SPECIFIED
INTERNAL MODEM CARD

BMTW-SVN01F-EN 225
Appendix B BCU (BMTS)

Installing UCM Communication Cards


in a BCU (BMTS)
You can install a card in any of the three modules on the BCU.

nCAUTION
Hazardous Voltage!
Turn off power at the BCU before installing the EIA-232 card. Failure to
turn off power before servicing may result in human injury or damage
to equipment.

To install a UCM communication card:


1. Align the card with the electronic components facing toward the bot-
tom of the BCU, and then slowly insert the card into the module at a
45-degree angle until the card is seated.
2. Slowly move the card from the 45-degree angle to 0 degrees (horizon-
tal), leaving the card perpendicular to the BCU logic board.
3. Secure the card using the two clips on each side of the module.
For an illustration of how to install a UCM communication card, see
Figure 99 on page 227.

226 BMTW-SVN01F-EN
Communication-Link Field Wiring for the BCU (BMTS)

Figure 99. UCM Communication Card Installation

Communication-Link Field Wiring for


the BCU (BMTS)
All Tracer Summit communication-link wiring is low voltage Class 2 and
must be field-supplied and installed in compliance with NEC and local
codes. To prevent electrical noise interference, all communication-link
wiring must also comply with the requirements outlined in this section
for wire selection and individual link configuration. Fiber optic UCM
communication is also available where extreme distance, electrical noise
immunity, or building-to-building communication is required. See
Figure 100 on page 228 for an example of typical UCM-communication-
link wiring.

BMTW-SVN01F-EN 227
Appendix B BCU (BMTS)

Figure 100. Typical UCM-Communication-Link Wiring

228 BMTW-SVN01F-EN
Startup and Troubleshooting Sequence for the BCU (BMTS)

Startup and Troubleshooting Sequence


for the BCU (BMTS)
BCU Power-up Sequence
The BCU logic board has two LEDs, CR16 and CR17, which are under
program control. In addition, two controllable LEDs, one red and one
green, are mounted on a bracket in the upper right corner of the enclo-
sure. All four LEDs are used to indicate various conditions during normal
BCU operation. They are also used during both the boot-up and power-
failure processes to indicate various diagnostic information.
Hardware reset causes both on-board LEDs and the off-board green LED
to light, and the off-board red LED to be unlit. This serves both as a lamp
test and as an indication that the BCU logic board has power.
The conditions shown in Table 39 may be most easily observed if
Ethernet/ARCNET, modem, and BACnet EIA-232 (if present) cables are
disconnected from the BCU before power is turned on.
Table 39. LED Power-up Sequences

Red Green CR16 CR17 Explanation

Off On On On Will occur for about one second immediately after power up. A
stop in this state usually denotes a missing, incorrectly
installed, or bad boot chip U18.
On Off On On Will occur briefly after power up. A stop in this state may
denote RAM failure or bad code in boot chip U18.
On On On On Unexpected interrupt. Hardware fault. This condition will per-
sist for approximately one second, at which time the Watchdog
Timer should cause a reset and restart the boot-up sequence.
On Off Off On This state will persist for several seconds while the BCU veri-
fies the CRC on its main code (BCU.IMG), and performs other
tests. A stop in this state may indicate RAM failure. A more
complete RAM test is done at this point, which may detect
errors not found earlier.
Off Flashing Flashing Off During normal operation, with or without a database, the
green code LED will flash at a slow rate; on for one second,
then off for one second. CR16 will flash rapidly, being on when
the processor is busy, and off when the processor is idle.

If no main code (BCU.IMG) is found or if the device ID DIP switches are


all on, the BCU will attempt to request code from a PC Workstation via
Ethernet/ARCNET. The sequences shown in Table 40 on page 230 may be
observed.
The continued quick flashing of the red LED, when the cable is connected,
indicates one of the following:
1. There is no PC Workstation connected to the Ethernet/ARCNET.

BMTW-SVN01F-EN 229
Appendix B BCU (BMTS)

Table 40. LED Power-up Sequences When No Main Code is Found or All DIP Switches are On

Red Green CR16 CR17 Explanation

Flashing Flashing Off On The red and green LEDs alternately flash several times per sec-
ond, indicating either a) a missing, bad, or misconfigured Ether-
net/ARCNET card, or b) that the BCU is unable to program its
Flash EPROM.
These two conditions may be distinguished if the ARCNET cable
is not connected when the BCU is powered up. If the BCU alter-
nately flashes red and green without the Ethernet/ARCNET
cable connected, then the problem lies with the card.
Flashing Off Off On If the Ethernet/ARCNET cable is not connected and the card is
good, the red LED will flash quickly (about 3 times per second)
for a period of about 5 seconds as the BCU tries to send a request
for a code download. It will then slow to a rate of about once per
second, indicating that no Ethernet/ARCNET token has been
found. The appearance of the slow flash when the cable is con-
nected indicates that no token has been found on the cable. This
indicates either a cable problem, or that no other Ethernet/ARC-
NET device is connected to the cable or powered up.

2. There is a PC Workstation connected to the Ethernet/ARCNET, but it


is not running Tracer Summit software.
3. There is a PC Workstation running Tracer Summit software that is
connected to the Ethernet/ARCNET, but it either does not have a
copy of BCU.IMG or does not have a copy of BCU.IMG that matches
the hardware configuration of the BCU. For example, version 3.0
BCU.IMG cannot be sent to double-speed BCUs (blue board) or to
BCUs that have had the memory upgrade. Version 4.0 and higher
BCU.IMG cannot be sent to BCUs that have not had the memory
upgrade.
In some cases, even if a PC Workstation exists and has an appropriate
copy of BCU.IMG, it make take from several seconds to a minute before it
will respond to the BCU’s request.

IMPORTANT
At this point, if the BCU was forced into code-request mode by turning
all DIP switches on, the BCU has not yet erased either code or data-
base. Code and database are cleared only when the first block of code
is received from the PC Workstation.

If the DIP switches are not all on when the final block of BCU.IMG has
been burned, the BCU will start its power-up sequence from the begin-
ning, in order to verify that the code was correctly received and burned.
When the BCU is receiving code, the LED sequences occur as shown in
Table 41 on page 231.

230 BMTW-SVN01F-EN
Startup and Troubleshooting Sequence for the BCU (BMTS)

Table 41. LED Sequences When BCU is Receiving Code

Red Green CR16 CR17 Explanation

On Flashing Off On When the BCU receives its first block of code from the PC
Workstation, the green LED will turn on for several seconds,
and then flash rapidly for several seconds. This indicates that
the BCU is erasing the Flash EPROM chips into which the code
will be burned. Three separate on/flicker sequences can be
observed—one per Flash EPROM chip. If a chip cannot be
erased, then the BCU will flash the red and green LEDs alter-
nately as described above.
Flashing Off Off On Once the BCU has erased Flash EPROM, the red LED will
flicker or flash as the BCU requests and receives additional
blocks of code from the PC Workstation and burns them into
Flash EPROM. If a chip cannot be programmed, then the BCU
will flash the red and green LEDs alternately as described
above.
Flashing Flashing Off On If the device ID DIP switches are all on when the final block of
BCU.IMG has been burned, the BCU will flash the red and
green LEDs together, several times per second. This is a nor-
mal condition. It serves as a warning that the BCU cannot
enter normal operation with the DIP switches all on. It will
persist until the BCU is turned off, the DIP switch changed,
and power is restored.

Effect of Cycling BCU Power


The effect of cycling power on the BCU is different than on other Trane
products such as the Tracer 100. Actions are as follows:
1. When power is restored, the BCU will go through the power up
sequence described above. In particular, it will verify that the main
code BCU.IMG is intact.
2. If the BCU determines that a complete power failure interrupt
sequence occurred, and that RAM is intact, then the contents of RAM
will be preserved. This includes the states of control vectors, trend
logs, and similar historical values. If the specified conditions are not
met, RAM will be cleared.
3. If an Ethernet card, ARCNET card, EIA-232 card, or modem has been
installed or removed during the power failure, RAM will be cleared.
4. All UCMs are scanned in order to acquire current input data.
5. Analog and Binary Input scan is enabled. Since the UCMs have
already been scanned, the values referenced by the Input Objects will
be current.
6. Certain special CPL routines execute in order to perform reset pro-
cessing. Applications may request outputs, but no outputs to UCMs
are actually performed.

BMTW-SVN01F-EN 231
Appendix B BCU (BMTS)

7. Normal application programs run. Applications may request outputs,


but no outputs to UCMs are actually performed. This allows compet-
ing applications programs to bid for control of various outputs, with-
out causing rapid changes in the physical output devices.
8. Once all application programs have run, outputs to the UCMs are
allowed, and outputs reflecting the current control states are sent to
all UCMs.
9. Once outputs have been sent to all UCMs, the BCU enters normal
operation.

BCU Reset Procedures


If the LED display sequence does not follow the startup sequence, it may
indicate a failure of the BCU. Depending on the failure mode and the
LED status displayed in the seven-segment LED display, you may need
to reset the BCU. Refer to Table 39 on page 229, Table 40 on page 230,
and Table 41 on page 231 for LED codes. There are four levels of reset for
the BCU (listed in order of least to most impact on the BCU):
1. Reset.
2. Clear BCU RAM and Reset.
3. Clear Database, RAM, and Reset.
4. Clear Code, Database, RAM, and Reset.
Except for the power off/on reset, the other reset procedures are typically
done by selecting BCU Reset/Restore from the Tools menu in Tracer Sum-
mit. All of the “Clear . . . Reset” procedures can also be done at the BCU
as described in the following subsections.

Reset
On the BCU, toggle the power at switch S1 off, then back on.

Clearing BCU RAM and Reset


In some cases, it may be desirable to clear the BCU’s RAM. This will be
done automatically after a power restoration if the following conditions
exist:
• The BCU’s code or database has been lost (refer to the following
sections).
• Corruption of the RAM is detected.
• The BCU did not complete its power failure interrupt sequence (for
example, if a Watchdog Timeout occurred, or the processor was reset
due to static discharge).
• The BCU had crashed before power was lost.
• An Ethernet/ARCNET, EIA-232, or modem card was installed or
removed during power down.

232 BMTW-SVN01F-EN
Startup and Troubleshooting Sequence for the BCU (BMTS)

In some cases of improper operation, it may be desirable to force BCU


RAM to be cleared. If turning power off and on does not help, RAM may
be cleared using one of the following procedures:
• From the PC Workstation’s Utilities menu, select the BCU reset/
restore function. Select the reset level “Clear RAM and Reset.”
• Use the DIP switch.
The BCU normally preserves the content of RAM through power failure.
RAM contains the current status of all BCU object trend data, events,
and alarms. In most cases, this is desirable. However there are circum-
stances in which you may need to clear RAM. This is normally done from
the PC Workstation, as described in the System Programming guide.
RAM can also be cleared at the BCU as follows:
1. Turn the BCU off and disconnect the Ethernet/ARCNET cable.

Note:
You must disconnect the Ethernet/ARCNET cable. If you do
not, then the PC Workstation will “helpfully” wipe out the
BCU’s database and begin sending code when the BCU is pow-
ered up with its DIP switches on. You may need to do this if
clearing RAM does not resolve the problem, but simply clearing
RAM should be tried first.

2. Turn all eight DIP switches on.


3. Turn power on and wait until the red LED on the bracket at the
upper right begins to flash.
4. Turn the BCU off and restore the DIP switches to their original state.
5. Reapply power and see if the BCU comes up.
6. If all looks OK, reconnect the Ethernet/ARCNET cable.

Clear Database, RAM, and Reset


In some cases, a BCU’s database may become obsolete. For example, a
BCU used as a demonstration unit will typically have a variety of data-
bases loaded into it from time to time.
In other cases, a BCU’s database may become corrupted. In such a case,
clearing RAM will not restore normal operation, and the database must
be cleared and restored.
The BCU’s database may be cleared using either of the following proce-
dures:
• From the PC Workstation’s Utilities menu, select the BCU reset/
restore function. Select the reset level “Clear Database and Reset.”
• Use the BCU DIP switches.
Database contains the user programmed data, which consists of all BCU
objects, such as areas, VAVs I/O, UCMs, trends, CPL, etc. See the defini-
tion of RAM in “Clearing BCU RAM and Reset” on page 232.

BMTW-SVN01F-EN 233
Appendix B BCU (BMTS)

In most cases, you will perform this operation from the PC Workstation,
as described in the System Programming guide. However, this can also be
done at the BCU using DIP switches.
The reset from the PC Workstation should not be used to clear the data-
base from a BCU that contains an unknown database. When such a BCU
is connected to the workstation, the workstation will interrogate the BCU
about its database and upload any objects contained in the BCU that the
workstation does not know about. It will also send the BCU objects in the
workstation’s database. In this way, the PC Workstation and BCU data-
bases will tend to merge. This is a bad idea. Use the BCU DIP switch
method to clear an unknown database out of a BCU.
The database may be cleared from a BCU using the DIP switches as
follows:
1. Disconnect the Ethernet/ARCNET cable from the BCU.

Note:
You must disconnect the Ethernet/ARCNET cable. If you do
not, then the PC Workstation may see the temporary existence
of a BCU whose device ID is set by the state of the DIP switches
in steps 4 and 5. If this device ID matches any on the current
site, the PC Workstation will attempt to download that device’s
database to the BCU, possibly resulting in a merged and man-
gled database.

2. Verify that the green LED is flashing normally—on for a second, off
for a second.
3. With power still applied, change any one of the eight DIP switches.
Switch 8 is probably the best, as it will change the BCU’s device ID
into one unlikely to be used on the site.
4. Watch the red/green LEDs until the green one goes out and the red
one comes on. This signifies that the BCU has detected a changed
DIP switch and is clearing its database.
5. With power still applied, restore the DIP switch that was changed in
step 3. Try to complete this step within a few seconds.
6. Verify that the BCU comes up.
7. If all looks OK, reconnect the Ethernet/ARCNET cable.

Clear Code, Database, RAM, and Reset


When a new version of Tracer Summit software is released, it is some-
times necessary to replace the code in the BCU if a new BCU code image,
BCU.IMG, was included with the new PC Workstation software.
In some cases, for example, a BCU used as a demonstration unit, the ver-
sion of software present in a BCU may be unknown. Such software should
be replaced with the current version.
Code consists of the BCU image software, which is similar to the BIOS in
a PC. See definitions of RAM in “Clearing BCU RAM and Reset” on

234 BMTW-SVN01F-EN
Startup and Troubleshooting Sequence for the BCU (BMTS)

page 232 and of database in “Clear Database, RAM, and Reset” on


page 233.
In most cases, you will force a BCU to accept new code from the PC Work-
station, as described in the System Programming guide.
The first option may not be available if changes were made to BACnet
communication between the old and new versions: the new PC Worksta-
tion software may not be able to talk to the old BCU software in order to
request that code be cleared. If such software changes are made, the new
installation CD would specify a procedure similar to the following:

Note:
You must have a PC Workstation connected, and that worksta-
tion must contain the appropriate version of the BCU code.

1. Disconnect all workstations except the one from which the reset will
be issued.
2. Upgrade the PC Workstation software. This will include a new ver-
sion of BCU.IMG.
3. Start up Tracer Summit. In Site Configuration, select the new BCU
image to be downloaded.
4. Next select Tools, BCU Reset/Restore, Select All, then select “Clear
Code/Database and Reset” and click the Reset button. This will
destroy the BCU’s code.
5. The new BCU.IMG will be sent to the BCUs.
However, this can also be done at the BCU as follows:
1. Turn off power at switch S1.
2. Disconnect the Ethernet/ARCNET cable.
3. Make a note of the address on switch S2.
4. Turn all DIP switches on S2 up or to the on position.
5. Turn on power at switch S1. The red alarm LED on the bracket will
flash twice per second and after about 10 seconds, slow down to once
per second.
6. With the red LED flashing either fast or slow, set the address for
switch S2 to the settings you noted in step 3.
7. Reconnect the Ethernet/ARCNET cable to a PC Workstation running
Tracer Summit.

BMTW-SVN01F-EN 235
Appendix B BCU (BMTS)

8. The green LEDs remain steadily lit shortly after connection of the
Ethernet/ARCNET cable. The LEDs will alternate between the green
LED remaining steadily lit and flashing three times before the red
LED begins to flash rapidly (about twice per second). Then, as the PC
Workstation begins to download code, the red LED begins to flash
rapidly and the Ethernet/ARCNET red or yellow LED begins to flash.
After about two to four minutes, the green LED lights and then goes
out. The red LED lights and then goes out, and finally, the green LED
begins to flash about once per second (normal condition).

IMPORTANT
The Clear Code, Database, RAM, and Reset function should rarely be
used. This reset level is predominately used when performing upgrades
or to salvage a BCU that won’t respond to lower reset levels.

Ethernet Card LEDs


Ethernet cards typically have two status LEDs, one green and one yellow.
• Solid green = normal
• Flashing yellow = Ethernet communication occurring

ARCNET/Hub Card LEDs


The ARCNET cards typically have two status LEDs, one red and one
green.
• Solid green = normal
• Flashing green = ARCNET reconfiguration occurring (indicating a
ARCNET LAN problem)
• Flashing red = ARCNET communication occurring with the BCU
Hub cards typically have two status LEDs, one red and one yellow.
• Solid red = link active
• Yellow off = normal operation
• Yellow on = indication of a network reconfiguration

236 BMTW-SVN01F-EN
Appendix C

Tracer Summit Critical


Control System

The Critical Control System is designed to meet FDA CFR part 11


requirements. The system retains certain critical data in the audit trail
database which is maintained by the SQL Database server. Because the
SQL database server acquires the data from the PC workstations it is rec-
ommended that at least two PC workstations be continuously in opera-
tion to prevent gaps in the audit trail.

Note:
The Tracer 100/Tracker communication feature and the Multi-
site, Grouping, and Global Change Control feature of Tracer
Summit are not available with the Critical Control System.

SQL Database Server Requirements


The minimum requirements for the PC running the Microsoft SQL Data-
base server are:
• Windows 2000 Server
• Microsoft SQL 2000 (standard or enterprise) database
• 1 GHz processor with a 512 cache
• 1 GB RAM
• two 36 GB SCSI hard drives
• Raid1 Parity system
• UPS

PC Workstation Requirements
The minimum requirements for a PC Workstation running Tracer Sum-
mit Critical Control System software are:
• Windows XP Professional operating system
• 1 GHz processor with a 512k cache
• 512 MB RAM
• 20 GB hard drive storage
• 8X CD-ROM to run the Tracer Summit Daily Operations Tutorial
• 15-inch SVGA monitor, 800 × 600 resolution, 16-bit color
• Mouse
• Keyboard

BMTW-SVN01F-EN 237
Appendix C Tracer Summit Critical Control System

• Parallel port for printer


• 16-bit sound card with speakers
• PCI slot for Ethernet or ARCNET adapter
• UPS

SQL software installation


The SQL database server is set up and configured by the IS staff at your
facility as designated by Microsoft installation instructions. For more
information, see Using Tracer Summit with a SQL Server Database, BAS-
PRB012-EN (updated instructions for installing SQL in Critical Control
Systems are available in the V16 Read Me notes).

Installing Tracer Summit Critical


Control System using Windows XP
IMPORTANT
Before installing Tracer Summit software, you must disable any anti-
virus software and shutdown any firewall software running on your PC.

You must have Internet Explorer Version 6.0 or higher installed on your
PC before installing Tracer Summit.
To install the Critical Control System software:
1. Close all applications and toolbars. To verify that all tasks are closed,
press Ctrl-Alt-Delete and end all the tasks except for Explorer.
2. Insert the Tracer Summit Critical Control system for Windows CD in
the CD-ROM drive of your PC. Tracer Summit automatically displays
the Tracer Summit Installation screen (see Figure 101 on page 238).

Figure 101. Tracer Summit Installation Screen

3. Click the Tracer Summit Setup Program button.

238 BMTW-SVN01F-EN
Installing Tracer Summit Critical Control System using Windows XP

4. Follow the online instructions to install the application. The installa-


tion process takes 5 to 10 minutes, depending on the speed of the PC
and the amount of available memory.

Setting up network adapters


Use the following instructions to set up network adapters for either
Ethernet or ARCNET.
To set up an Ethernet adapter using plug and play installation:
Follow the manufacturer’s plug and play instructions for an Ethernet
LAN adapter. When installation is complete, install the network adapter
protocol, and then verify the adapter status.
To install a PCI or PCMCIA ARCNET card:
1. Install the ARCNET card:
• For PCI ARCNET cards, shut down the PC Workstation and
install the PCI20 ARCNET card in an available PCI slot. Insert
the Tracer Summit software CD in the CD-ROM drive of your
computer. Then, restart the computer. Follow steps 2–4.
• For PCMCIA ARCNET cards, insert the card with Windows XP or
Windows 2000 running. Follow steps 2–4.
2. Windows XP Plug and Play software will detect the card and initiate
the new hardware installation wizard.
3. When prompted to specify a location for the card driver, specify
E:\ARC_XP. (“E” represents the drive letter for the CD-ROM drive,
which may be different on your PC.)
4. Restart the PC if prompted.

Note:
The ISA ARCNET card is not supported by Windows XP.

Installing the Network Adapter Protocol


The network adapter protocol is the language the computer uses to com-
municate over the network. How you install the network adapter protocol
depends on the operating system and the adapter type.
• For Windows XP systems using Ethernet or ARCNET adapters on a
dedicated network, Tracer Summit automatically installs support. It
is only necessary to verify the adapter settings (see “Verifying Net-
work Adapter Status and Protocol for Windows XP” on page 240).
• For Windows XP systems using Ethernet adapters on a shared net-
work, you may need to install TCP/IP protocol (see “Installing TCP/IP
Protocol for BACnet/IP Communications on Shared Ethernet Net-
works” below).

BMTW-SVN01F-EN 239
Appendix C Tracer Summit Critical Control System

Installing TCP/IP Protocol for BACnet/IP


Communications on Shared Ethernet Networks
Before installing TCP/IP, check the network settings for the adapter to
verify that TCP/IP is not already installed on the PC Workstation. Many
PC Workstations supplied by a customer already have TCP/IP protocols
installed on the machines and automatically bind this protocol to an
adapter when you install the adapter on the PC Workstation.
To install TCP/IP protocol on Windows XP:
1. From the Windows Start menu, select Settings. Then, select Control
Panel.
2. Double-click the Network and Dial-up Connections icon.
3. For each adapter, double-click the connection name that corresponds
to the Ethernet adapter.
4. In the adapter Properties dialog box, click on the Install button, select
the protocol, then click the Add button. The Select Network Protocol
dialog box displays.
5. In the Select Network Protocol dialog box, click the Internet Protocol
(TCP/IP).
6. Click the OK button.
7. Enter the required IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway
information. (This information can be obtained from the customer’s
Information Systems group.)
8. Click the OK button.
9. Restart the computer.

Verifying Network Adapter Status and Protocol


for Windows XP
1. From the Windows Start menu, select Settings. Then, select Control
Panel.
2. Double-click the Network and Dial-up Connections icon.
3. For each adapter double-click the connection name that corresponds
to the Ethernet or ARCNET adapter. Verify the adapter settings:
• For dedicated Ethernet and ARCNET, Tracer Summit automati-
cally installs support. Verify that the adapter is not bound to any
other protocols.
• For Ethernet adapters on a shared network, verify that the TCP/
IP protocol is installed. Information Systems personnel who are
in charge of the workstation should verify any other protocols
selected.

240 BMTW-SVN01F-EN
Initial Startup on SQL database

4. Click the OK button. If you made any changes, you will need to
restart the PC when prompted.

Note:
After you have set up the network adapter, you need to verify
the adapter status to make sure there are no conflicts with
other IRQ or I/O addresses. The Windows XP system automati-
cally checks for resource conflicts when you are installing new
adapters.

Initial Startup on SQL database


Before starting the Critical Control System for the first time, the data-
base must be properly configured.
To Set Up the Database
1. Right click on the Start menu and choose Explore to start Windows
Explorer.
2. Browse to Program Files and open Tracer Summit (see Figure 102 on
page 241).

Figure 102. Database Folder

3. Highlight the Database folder


4. Hold the Ctrl key down and select auditTrail.tdl, eventlog.tdl, rpt-
def.tdl, summit.tdl, and tsdbep.
5. Right click and delete these files.

BMTW-SVN01F-EN 241
Appendix C Tracer Summit Critical Control System

6. From the Start menu (see Figure 103) point to Programs, Tracer
Summit, Advanced and click on Database Setup Utilities (see
Figure 104 on page 243) .

Figure 103. Choose Database Setup Utilities

242 BMTW-SVN01F-EN
Initial Startup on SQL database

Figure 104. Database Setup Utility

7. The Database Setup utility window displays . Specify the correct


Server Name (the SQL system administrator can supply this informa-
tion).
8. Click OK.

BMTW-SVN01F-EN 243
Appendix C Tracer Summit Critical Control System

Registration considerations
Critical Control System software has two options:
• Tracer Summit base system and Critical Control System. This option
has two authorization codes. One code, starting with E1154, is for the
base Tracer Summit system. The other authorization code, starting
with E1148 will activate the Critical Control System features.
• Critical Control System only. This option is for sites that already
have the base Tracer Summit system. The first five characters of this
authorization code are E1149. If you have this option skip steps 1-9
below.
To register Tracer Summit and Critical Control System software:
1. Click the Help menu and select About Tracer Summit (see
Figure 105).

Figure 105. Help Menu

2. From the About Tracer Summit dialog box click the Register Tracer
Summit button (see Figure 106).

Figure 106. About Tracer Summit.

244 BMTW-SVN01F-EN
Registration considerations

3. Select a registration method on the Registration Method dialog box


(see Figure 107).

Figure 107. Registration Method

4. Click Next. The Which PC dialog box displays (see Figure 109 on
page 247).

BMTW-SVN01F-EN 245
Appendix C Tracer Summit Critical Control System

5. Select a PC Workstation to register.


6. Click Next. The Registration Requirements dialog box displays (see
Figure 109 on page 247).

Figure 108. Which PC?

246 BMTW-SVN01F-EN
Registration considerations

7. At step 1, type the locking code and complete the worksheet in the
Registration Requirements dialog.

Figure 109. Registration Requirements

8. Follow the instructions to complete the registration using the base


Tracer Summit authorization code (E1154).
9. Click Finish.
10. The base Tracer Summit system features are now enabled. Use this
base Tracer Summit system software to create and configure all the
objects, devices, and points for the site. The base Tracer Summit sys-
tem should be used throughout the commissioning and check-out
phase of the operation.

IMPORTANT:
It is strongly recommended that you do not register the Critical Control
System authorization code until the site is finished and operational.
Once the Critical Control System authorization code has been regis-
tered, system changes and operator actions will require an operator
authentication dialog. This authentication process can be very cumber-
some and time-consuming during site creation and commissioning.

IMPORTANT:
Service technicians often have many different sites for many different
customers on their PCs. It is important to note that once the Critical
Control System authorization code has been registered, every site on

BMTW-SVN01F-EN 247
Appendix C Tracer Summit Critical Control System

the PC, not just the FDA compliant facility, will require operator authen-
tication for changes to the system

After the site has been commissioned and tested, use steps 1-9 above to
register the authorization code for Critical Control System(E1148 or
E1149). This registration will activate all the special Critical Control Sys-
tem features. FDA compliance requires that system changes and operator
actions must be authenticated and retained in the audit trail database.

More information is available in BMTX-SVN02A-EN.

248 BMTW-SVN01F-EN
Index

Numerics Device IDs, need for unique, 149


Verifying communication, 168
10Base2 BACnet/IP
Distance limits in network wiring, 152 Utilities, 194
In network wiring, 6 BACnet/IP router, 149, 166, 167, 170
10BaseT BBMD, 167, 169
Distance limits in network wiring, 152 BCU
In network wiring, 6 Addressing, 149
120 Vac, 31 Applying warning labels, 32
24 Vac (100 mA) output, 38, 42 Causes of interference in European
240 Vac, 31 Community installations, 22
Causes of interference in
international installations, 27
A Causes of interference in North
American installations, 16
Absorption chiller, see UCP2 Causes of overheating in European
AC power, checking, 30 Community installations, 22
Addressing for UCMs, see UCM wiring Causes of overheating in
and addressing international installations, 27
AH540/541, see Tracer AH540/541 Causes of overheating in North
Analog inputs, see Universal inputs American installations, 16
Analog wiring, 37 Checking input wiring, 13
ARCNET Adapter, 180 Checking panel placement, 13
ARCNET cards, 147 Checking power supply wiring, 13
Addresses, DIP switch settings for, Clear code, database, RAM, and reset
162 procedure, 205
Configuring, 159 Clear database, RAM, and reset
Descriptions, 161 procedure, 204
DIP switch settings for, 162 Clear RAM and reset procedure, 204
Installing in BCU panel, 163 Clearance specifications, 18
Jumper settings for, 159, 161 Communication protocol, 9
Single coaxial input interface card, Components of, 3–4
158 Configuring for BACnet/IP, 194
Single fiber-optic input interface card, Cover, installing and removing, 32
158 Definition, 213
Three input coaxial hub card, 158 Device address, 149
Two coaxial/one fiber-optic hub card, Device ID, 149
159 Dimensional drawing, 17
ARCNET Definition, 213 DIP switch settings, 151
ARCNET LAN, 153 High capacity card, 3
Calculating propagation delay of, 156 I/O module see BCU I/O module
Distance limits, 152, 153, 154, 155 Installing cable connectors for
Termination, 153, 154, 155 network, 163
authorization codes, 244 Location selection for European
Community installations, 22
Location selection for international
installations, 26
B Location selection for North
BACnet American installations, 16
Communication over LANs, 147 Logic board, installing and wiring, 31
Definition, 213 Model number, 12
Modem, see BCU modem

BMTW-SVN01F-EN 249
Index

Mounting for European Installing BCU communication Distance limits for cable in
Community installations, 21 card in, 53 network wiring, 152
Mounting for international Seven-segment LED display Comm2 card, 48
installations, 26 codes, 199, 201–205 Comm3 card, isolated, 49
Mounting for North American UCM communication cards in, 47 Comm3 card, non-isolated, 50
installations, 15 UCM communication with, 47 Comm4 card, 51
Operation status, 199, 201–205 BCU modem Comm5 card, 52
Operator display, installing, Card configuration, 175 Comm5 physical link repeater, 60
33–36 Card installation, 178 Comm5 termination resistors, 59
Panel mismatch error, 210 Checking installation, 14 Comm5 UCMs
Power supply voltages, 31 Diagram of jumper blocks, 175 Description of types, 141–143
Power wiring for European Installing, 175 Generic LonTalk® devices, 143
Community installations, 21, 24 Jumper settings, 175 Neuron ID, 144
Power wiring for international Modem function settings, 176 Overview, 140
installations, 26, 28 Precludes use of EIA-232 Tracer AH540/541 controllers,
Power wiring for North American communication, 175 141
installations, 15, 19 Requirements, 9 Tracer loop controller, 141
Reset procedures, 203 Supported models, 175 Tracer MP501 controller, 141
Specifications for European BCU panel Tracer MP503 I/O module, 142
Community installations, 22 Installing ARCNET card in, 163 Tracer MP580/581 controllers,
Specifications for international Installing EIA-232 card in, 172 142
installations, 27 Installing Ethernet card in, 157 Tracer VV550/551, 142
Specifications for North Storage temperatures, 13 Tracer zone controllers, 142
American installations, 16 Binary output Wiring, 143
Standard capacity card, 3 Definition, 213 Zone sensor communication
Startup sequence for new, 203 General, 43 jack, 144
Startup sequence for Location, 38 Zone sensor communication
programmed, 203 Binary wiring, 37 stubs, 144
Troubleshooting, 207–210 BOP, see Binary output Commercial self-contained, see CSC
UCM communication with, BOP1, see Binary output Communication link
restrictions, 46 Broadcast distribution table, 169 Comm5 physical link repeater, 60
Wiring for European Community Building control unit, see BCU Comm5 termination resistors, 59
installations, 21 Bus topology configuration Definition, 213
Wiring for international ARCNET LAN, 153 Locations on BCU logic board, 47
installations, 26 Ethernet LAN, 153 Purpose, 45
Wiring for North American Bus/star topology configuration UCM to BCU, restrictions, 46
installations, 15 ARCNET LAN, 155 UCM, see Wiring for a UCM
BCU (BMTS), 223–236 Ethernet LAN, 155 Communication status between BCU
Communication-link field wiring, and UCM, 199, 200
227 Compatibility with non-Trane
Components, 223 C systems, 171
General, 223 Configuration, definition, 214
Installing UCM communication Cable connector Controllers
cards, 226 Checking installation, 165 Tracer air-handler controller, 141
Startup and troubleshooting Installing in BCU, 163 Tracer loop controller, 141
sequence, 229 Capacity card Tracer MP501 controller, 141
BCU I/O module High, 3 Tracer MP503 I/O module, 142
24 Vac (100 mA) output, 38, 42 Standard, 3 Tracer MP580/581controllers, 142
Analog inputs, 38 CCP Tracer zone controllers, 142
Analog wiring, 37 Definition, 120 Critical Control System, 237
Binary output, 38, 43 Wiring and addressing, 123 authorization code, 244
Binary wiring, 37 CenTraVac unit control panel, see registration, 244
Inputs, 38, 39 UCP1 CSC
Installation, 37 Centrifugal chiller, see UCP2 Definition, 74
Terminal block TB1, 38 CGA/CGW/CGAF, see Scroll chiller Wiring and addressing, 74
Universal inputs, 38, 39 Coaxial
Wiring with jumpers, 37, 38, 39, Cable 50 ohm, see 10Base2
40 Cable connector, see Cable D
BCU logic board connector
DIP switch location, 150 Cable in network wiring, 7 DAC
Installing and wiring, 31 Definition, 214

250 BMTW-SVN01F-EN
Index

See also Discharge Air Controller F Hardware checklist, 13


profile IP, 166
Daily Operations Tutorial FDA Installation, 237 Preparing for, 1
Installing, 195–197 Ferrule, selecting, 165 Sequence for Tracer Summit, 179
Location of buttons, 195 Fiber-optic cable Tracer Summit, 179–194
Daisy chain configuration for UCM Calculating decibel loss for, 8 installing
wiring, 56 Calculating propagation delay of, SQL database software, 238
Database setup, 241 156 IntelliPak
Decibel loss Decibel-loss factors, 8 Definition, 82
Calculating for fiber-optic cable, Example with twisted-pair wire Wiring and addressing, 82
8, 68 for UCM communication, 67 Interference, causes of
Fiber-optic cable, factors, 8, 67 For UCM communication, 64 European Community
In fiber-optic cable, 65 General, 5 installations, 22
Device Network communications International installations, 27
Addressing and wiring for UCMs, requirements, 7 North American installations, 16
see UCM wiring and Types available from Trane, 7 Internet Protocol, 147
addressing Fiber-optic modem Definition, 215
UCM types, 46 Connections, 65 IP installation
Device ID EIA-485, 65 BBMD, 167, 169
Definition, 214 Exception for buildings without BCU setup, 168
DIP switch settings for BCU, 151 BCU, 66 Broadcast distribution table, 169
In BACnet, 149 Mounting and wiring, 65 Multiple sites on a shared
DIP switch network, 170
Definition, 214 Ping, 169
Location on BCU logic board, 150 G Procedures, 166
Settings for ARCNET card, 162 Programming the site, 167
Settings for BCU device IDs, 151 Generic LonTalk® devices, 143 Special situations, 170
Settings for UCMs, see UCM GLD objects, 143 Subnet mask, 166
wiring and addressing GLD, definition, 214 System checkout, 168
DIP switch addresses TCP/IP, 166
Calculating, 220 IP preinstallation, 166
Setting, 219–220, 237–?? IP subnet, 170
Table for setting, 221
H IP Validation utility, 166, 167
Discharge Air Controller profile, 141, IP, see Internet Protocol
Hardware installation checklist, 13
142
Helical rotary chiller, see UCP2
Documentation shipped with Tracer
High capacity card, 3
Summit, 11
Horizon absorption chiller J
Definition, 79
Wiring and addressing, 80 Jumper
E Hub Block locations for modems, 175
Distance to a terminating device, Settings for ARCNET cards, 159,
EIA/TIA cabling standard, 6 154 161
EIA-232 communication In bus/star topology, 154 Settings for modems, 175
DB-25 connector pin In star topology, 153 Jumper wiring, see Wiring for
assignments, 174 Hub card, see ARCNET cards jumpers
Definition, 214 HVAC, 214
General, 171
Installing an EIA-232 card, 171 L
EIA-232 port to mini-monitor, 201
EIA-485
I LAN
Data repeater, 65 Definition, 215
Inputs, see Universal inputs
Data transceiver, 65 Wiring, see Wiring for the
Inspection of shipment, 11
EMI/RFI, 214 network
Installation
Ethernet LCP
BCU I/O module, 37
Card configuration, 157 Definition, 86
BCU logic board, 31
Definition, 214 Wiring and addressing, 87
BCU, European Community, 21
LAN distance limits, 152, 153, LEDs
BCU, international, 26
154, 155 BCU reset procedures, 203
BCU, North American, 15
Required for LAN devices, 157 Clear code, database, RAM, and
Custom, 186–188
Termination, 153, 154, 155 reset procedure, 205
FDA, 237

BMTW-SVN01F-EN 251
Index

Clear database, RAM, and reset Communication configurations, Requirements and specifications,
procedure, 204 147 9
Clear RAM and reset procedure, Connecting dedicated and Repeater, Comm5 physical link, 60
204 shared, 149 Resistance requirements for coaxial
Codes interpreted, 201, 202 Dedicated Tracer Summit, 148 cable connections, 165
Indicators for BCU Multiple sites, 170 Resistors, Comm5 link termination,
communication status, 199, 200 Shared Tracer Summit, 148 59
Locations on BCU logic board, Topology requirements, 151 Router, BACnet/IP, 149, 166, 167, 170
200 Tracer Summit mixed, 149 RTA-RTW
Seven-segment display codes, Wiring, see Wiring for the Definition, 97
199, 201–205 network Wiring and addressing, 97
Startup sequence for new BCU, Neuron ID, 144
203 NMR, 216
Startup sequence for S
programmed BCU, 203
Lighting control panel, see LCP O SCC
Logic board, installing and wiring, 15 Definition, 216
LonMark™ profiles Operator display See also Space Comfort
Discharge Air Controller (DAC), Beeping, 36 Controller profile
141, 142 Conflict with mini-monitor, 3, 36 Scroll chiller
Space Comfort Controller (SCC), Installing, 33–36 Definition, 99
141, 142 Socket location, 4 Trane Europe chiller, 115
LonTalk® protocol, 140 Optical-link loss, see Decibel loss Wiring and addressing, 99
Definition, 215 Output, see Binary output Setup
Overheating, causes of Custom, 186–188
European Community Signal degradation, see Decibel loss,
M installations, 22 69
International installations, 27 Softset, definition, 216
Memory card, see Capacity card North American installations, 16 Software requirements, 11
Microsoft Space Comfort Controller profile,
Internet Explorer, version 141, 142
requirements, 11 P SQL database, 237
Windows, version requirements, Standard capacity card, 3
11 PC requirements, 237 Standard network variable type, 143
Mini-monitor, 3, 201 PC Workstation Definition, 216
Conflict with operator display, 3, Installation package, 11 Star topology configuration
36 Modem requirements, 9 ARCNET LAN, 154
Model number, 12 Requirements, 10–11, 237–?? Ethernet LAN, 154
Modem PC workstation Storage of BCU panels, 13
Definition, 215 Definition, 216 SVNT, see Standard network
Fiber-optic modem, 65 On network, 148 variable type
See also BCU modem PCM System, see Tracer Summit
Modular BCU, see BCU Definition, 93
Mounting a BCU Wiring and addressing, 94
European Community Ping, IP communication, 169 T
installations, 21 Plenum-rated cable, 7
International installations, 26 Power supply TB1, 38
North American installations, 15 Voltages required for BCU, 31 TCM
MP501, see Tracer M501 controller Product ID, see Model number Definition, 109
MP503, see Tracer MP503 I/O Programmable control module, see Wiring and addressing, 109
module PCM Tee connector
MP580/581, see Tracer M580/581 Propagation delay, calculating, 156 Coaxial cable termination, 165
controllers Not for use with hub card, 158,
Multiple sites on a single shared 159
network, 170 R With ARCNET card, 158
Terminal unit controller, see TUC
registration Termination
N considerations, 244 ARCNET LAN, 153, 154, 155
Remote communication Ethernet LAN, 153, 154, 155
Network Baud rate supported by BCU, 9 Termination resistors for Comm5
Checking wiring, 14 Protocol, 9 links, 59

252 BMTW-SVN01F-EN
Index

Thermistors, sensor resistance Wiring and addressing, 104 VAV wireless receiver, 135
values, 41 Tutorial button, 195 Voyager RTU, 139
Thermostat control module, see See also Daily Operations UCP1
TCM Tutorial Definition, 69
Thinnet, see 10Base2 Twisted-pair wire, 5 Wiring and addressing, 70
Topology Unshielded for use in LAN, see UCP2
Bus, 152 10BaseT Definition, 71
Combination bus/star, 154 Twisted-pair wire for UCM Wiring and addressing, 72
Definition, 151, 216 communications, 55 UDP port, 166
Star, 153 UIPs, see Universal inputs
Tracer AH540/541, 141 Uninstalling Tracer Summit, 193
Tracer air-handler controllers, 141 U Unit control module, see UCM
Tracer loop controller, 141 Universal input
Tracer MP501 controller, 141 UCM Binary configured, 40
Tracer MP503 I/0 module, 142 Addressing for UCM devices, see Circuit characteristics, 39
Tracer MP580/581 controllers, 142 UCM wiring and addressing Current and voltage configured,
Tracer remote station, see TRS BCU communication status, 199, 42
Tracer Summit 200 Definition, 217
Installing, 179–194 BCU link types, 46 Jumper configurations, 39
Installing using Windows 98, 182 Checking wiring, 13 Operating ranges, 39
Installing using Windows ME, Communication cards, see UCM Pulse/meter devices, 40
188 communication cards Temperature sensor wiring
Installing using Windows NT, 191 Communication link, 45 diagram, 42
Installing using Windows XP or Definition, 69 Thermistor configured, 41
2000, 180, 238 UCM types and their Thermistor temperature sensor,
installing using Windows XP or communication links, 46 41
2000, 238 UCM communication cards Wiring, 37
Model number, 12 Comm2 card, 48 Universal programmable control
Procedures for starting, 194 Comm4 card, 51 module, see UPCM
Setup sequence, 179 Comm5 card, 52 Unshielded twisted-pair wire, see
System overview, 1 General, 47 10BaseT
Uninstalling, 193 Installing, 52 UPCM
Uninstalling, exceptions to, 193 Isolated Comm3 card, 49 Definition, 117
Tracer Summit Critical Control Non-isolated Comm3 card, 50 Wiring and addressing, 117
System, 237 Number of, 45
Tracer VV550/551 controllers, 142 Uninstalling, 53
Tracer ZN510/511, 142 UCM wiring and addressing V
Tracer ZN520/521, 142 CCP, 124
Tracer zone controller CSC, 76 Variable air volume, see VAV
Definition, 142 Horizon absorption chiller, 81 Varitrac II central control panel, see
Wiring and addressing, 142 IntelliPak, 86 CCP
Trane Europe chiller PCM, 95 VariTrane DDC/VAV
Definition, 115 RTA-RTW, 98 Definition, 126
Wiring and addressing, 115 Scroll chiller, 102 Wiring and addressing, 126
Trane model number, 12 TCM, 110 VAV I, VAV IA, VAV II, VAV III, VAV IV
Transceiver cards, 153, 154 Tracer air-handler controllers, see VariTrane DDC/VAV
Troubleshooting 141 VAV wireless receiver
BCU does not communicate via Tracer loop controller, 141 Definition, 133
modem, 208 Tracer MP501 controller, 141 Wiring and addressing, 133
BCU does not communicate with Tracer MP503 I/O module, 142 Voyager RTU
UCMs, 209 Tracer MP580/581 controllers, Definition, 137
BCU does not respond, 207 142 Wiring and addressing, 138
BCU locks up, 208 Tracer zone controller, 142 VV550/551
BCU panel mismatch error, 210 Tracer zone controllers, 142 see Tracer VV550/551
TRS Trane Europe chiller, 116
Definition, 112 TRS, 114
Wiring and addressing, 112 TUC, 105 W
Trunk and branch configuration for UCP1, 71
UCM wiring, 58 UCP2, 73 Warning labels for BCU, 32
TUC UPCM, 118 Wire capacitance, 55
Definition, 104 VariTrane DDC/VAV, 127 Wiring a BCU

BMTW-SVN01F-EN 253
Index

European Community
installations, 21, 24
International installations, 26, 28
Logic card wiring, 31
North American installations, 15,
19
Wiring for devices, see UCM wiring
and addressing
Wiring for the network
10Base2 (50 ohm coaxial) with
Ethernet, 6
10BaseT with Ethernet, 6
ARCNET, see also ARCNET LAN
Checking, 14
Coaxial 9 ohm with ARCNET, 7
Distance limits, 151
Fiber-optic cable with Ethernet,
ARCNET, 7
LAN communication links,
requirements, 6
Unshielded, twisted-pair wire, 6
Wiring for UCM communications
Checking, 13
Configuring and terminating
links, 56
Daisy chain configuration, 56
Example, 55
Fiber-optic cable, 5, 64
Input/output wiring, 54
Physical link repeaters for
Comm5 links, 60
Termination resistors for Comm5
links, 59
Trunk and branch configuration,
58
Twisted-pair wire, 5, 55
Wiring with jumpers, 37, 40
Circuit characteristics of input
device types, 39
Configurations, 39
Locations of universal input
jumpers, 38, 40
Operating range of input device
types, 39
Wiring, universal inputs, 37

Z
ZN510/511, see Tracer ZN510/511
ZN520/521, see Tracer ZN520/521
Zone controllers, see Tracer zone
controllers
Zone Sensor
Communication jack, 144
Communication stubs, 144

254 BMTW-SVN01F-EN
Reader 1. In a word, how would you describe this guide?
________________________

Response 2. Using the following scale, rate the overall quality of this guide:
(Use the following scale.)
Form 1 2 3 4 5
Dreadful Terrific

3. How do you use this guide? (Choose one.)


Our goal is to provide accurate a. I read it from beginning to end.
and efficient information
b. I read only the sections that pertain to my immediate needs.
to our customers. Please use
this form to help us improve c. I read only the sections that pertain to my job.
the quality and usability
of this guide. Make copies of 4. How easily can you find information in this guide?
this form if needed. 1 2 3 4 5
Not easy at all Moderately Very easy
—very difficult easy

5. When you actually try the instructions described in this guide, how
easily can you follow them?
1 2 3 4 5
I can’t Occasionally With
follow the the content great
instructions is confusing ease
at all.

6. How well did you understand the product before reading this guide?
1 2 3 4 5
Not at all Somewhat Thoroughly

7. How well did you understand the product after reading the guide?
1 2 3 4 5
Not at all Somewhat Thoroughly

Please send this form 8. The best aspect of this guide is __________________________________
by fax or mail to:
_______________________________________________________________
Trane GCC
Product Communications
4833 White Bear Parkway 9. If we were to change one aspect of this guide, it should be _________
St. Paul, MN 55110
_______________________________________________________________
(fax) 651-407-4198
10. Name, e-mail address: (optional) _________________________________
_______________________________________________________________

BMTW-SVN01F-EN 255
Reader Response Form

256 BMTW-SVN01F-EN
Literature Order Number BMTW-SVN01F-EN
File Number SV-ES-BAS-BMTW-SVN-01F-EN-0704
Supersedes BMTW-SVN01E-EN September 2003
Trane Stocking Location Electronic only
A business of American Standard Companies
www.trane.com
Trane has a policy of continuous product and product data improvement and reserves the right to
For more information, contact your local Trane change design and specifications without notice. Only qualified technicians should perform the installa-
office or e-mail us at comfort@trane.com tion and servicing of equipment referred to in this publication.

You might also like